JP2023070717A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase interest of a game through a performance.SOLUTION: An execution pattern of a character movement performance includes a first pattern in which a performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited after variation display to be determined and a second pattern in which a performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited after variation display to be determined. After a switching suggestion performance is executed, a performance pattern of the character movement performance may be switched from a performance pattern without inheritance to a performance pattern with inheritance. Following the execution of the switching suggestion performance in a performance execution example 002AK113, the character movement performance is executed in response to the performance pattern in which a character is switched to a character CH11 to be displayed which is different from the character before the switching suggestion performance is executed, in a performance execution example 002AK116.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-33

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, it is possible to execute a special background presentation as a pre-reading notice, and a volcanic landscape including the night sky, mountains and volcanic smoke is displayed as a background image when the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. A game machine that displays a special background image has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-192208

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in enhancing the entertainment by staging.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances the enjoyment of a game through presentation.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
A first effect and a second effect switched after execution of the first effect can be executed as a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state when the variable display is in a ready-to-reach state. Suggestion production execution means;
a corresponding effect executing means capable of executing a first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect and a second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect;
The corresponding effect execution means is capable of starting execution of the second corresponding effect during execution of the first effect before switching from the first effect to the second effect.
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, the player can know in advance that the game will be switched to the second effect, and the game interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the random number for a game. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing for game control. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special design process processing jump table. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing for production control. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a screen display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command at the time of start-up winning. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect image display; It is a flow chart which shows an example of prefetch effect setting processing. It is a figure which shows the usage example of the storage data regarding the prefetch effect setting process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of character movement effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of use of stored data relating to character movement effect determination processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of an production|presentation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of an production|presentation pattern, etc. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of timer effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of use of data relating to timer effect determination processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of use of data relating to timer effect determination processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during character movement effect execution; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of use of stored data relating to processing during execution of character movement effect; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during timer effect execution. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation design variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the determination example regarding an active display change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the determination example regarding the after-reach production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during production design fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a setting example of a character display rate; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the execution control example of active display change production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the execution control example of the production|presentation which makes a production|presentation design transparent. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the execution control example of a timer waiting production|presentation and a timer production|presentation.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the right side of the game area. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display special symbols as a plurality of types of special identification information. A special design is also called a "special design." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game". Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9", symbols representing "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. "Variable display" also means that a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner with respect to other symbols such as effect symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols. The production design is also called a decoration design or a decoration design. Variable display is also referred to as variable display or simply variation. Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation, enlargement, and reduction of one or more patterns. Variation may include a mode of blinking a certain symbol. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in an updatable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, a plurality of types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of arbitrary patterns, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed at the end as a display result. A stop display is also referred to as a derivation display, or simply a derivation. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display is also called a final stop symbol or a fixed symbol. The final stop symbol in the special symbol game is also called a fixed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also referred to as the variable display result. The display result of a special design is also called a special figure display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also called variable display time. Different times can be set for the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbols in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also called "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also called a "second special symbol". A special game using the first special game is also called a "first special game". A special game using the second special game is also called a "second special game". There may be one type of special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols.

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 . In the example shown in FIG. 1, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display device 20 can variably display normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary design is also called 'Fu-zu'. The variable display of normal symbols is also called a “normal game”. The normal symbol display 20 is configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers representing "0" to "9", symbols representing "-", and other arbitrary lighting patterns. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which some or all of the plurality of LEDs are turned on, or a pattern in which all of the plurality of LEDs are turned off. The final stop pattern in the general pattern game is also called a fixed normal pattern. The normal pattern display result is also called a normal pattern display result. The execution time during which the normal pattern is variably displayed in the general pattern game is also referred to as general pattern fluctuation time. The normal pattern fluctuation time can be set to different times corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 may be, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), a dot matrix LED, a projector and a screen, a stereoscopic image projection device, or any other mechanism that can form any image. Just do it. The image display device 5 can display various effect images. In addition, the image display device 5 can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image, without being limited to the effect image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to perform variable display of the effect symbols in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game. The production pattern is a display pattern showing numbers and the like, and serves as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from special patterns and normal patterns. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided for the first special symbol game or the second special symbol. In synchronism with the game, for example, the performance symbols are displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction or being updated, thereby performing variable display of the performance symbols. Synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which pattern variation is started and the timing at which the pattern is finally stopped and displayed after the variation is completed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop pattern in the variable display of the production pattern is also called a fixed production pattern, a fixed decorative pattern, or a fixed decorative pattern. Since the variable display of the performance symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the performance symbols is the same as the special symbol fluctuation time.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 in which effect images corresponding to the suspended display and the active display can be displayed. A pending display is a display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed and is on hold. An active display is a display that corresponds to a running variable display. Suspended presentations and active presentations are also collectively referred to as variable presentation-enabled presentations that correspond to variable presentations. A display area for holding display is also called a holding display area. A display area for active display is also called an active display area. The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The total value of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 1, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. . The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal design display 20 shown in FIG. 1, a normal design suspension display 25C including a plurality of LEDs is provided. 25 C of normal-map reservation|holding indicators display the number of normal-map reservation|holding memory|storages by the lighting number of LEDs. The number of reserved memory for the normal pattern is the number of reserved memory corresponding to the normal pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. Winning ball device 6A, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting prize opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 2 as a normal electric accessory. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, whereby the second start-up is performed. A closed state in which game balls do not enter the winning opening or a normal open state in which game balls hardly enter the second starting winning opening. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing to the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the ON state. The mouth is in an enlarged open state in which game balls can easily enter. The open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening or the enlarged open state in which it is easy to enter is also called the first variable state. The closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning hole or the normal open state in which it is difficult to enter is also called the second variable state. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can be changed between the first variable state and the second variable state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip-shaped accessory.

The entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as the first starting winning. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as second starting winning. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the first reserved storage number can be updated to be incremented by one. However, when the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit number, the first reserved memory number is not updated even if the first start winning is generated. Corresponding to the case where 1 is added to the first reserved memory number, the first starting condition is established, and the first special symbol game in which the special symbols are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A can be executed. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the second reserved storage number can be updated to be incremented by one. However, when the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit number, the second reserved memory number is not updated even if the second start winning is generated. Corresponding to the case where 1 is added to the second reserved memory number, the second starting condition is established, and the second special symbol game in which the special symbols are variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B can be executed.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a general prize winning opening 10 is provided which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 1, two general winning openings 10 are provided at the lower left corner of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as ten, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first route and a second route are provided as flow paths along which game balls flow. The first path is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called a left game area or a left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called a right game area or a right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like. Shooting a game ball toward the left game area in order to make the game ball flow down the first path is also called left hitting. Shooting a game ball toward the right game area in order to make the game ball flow down the second path is also called right hitting. The first path is also referred to as a left-handed path. The second path is also called a right-handed path. The first route and the second route may be composed of separate routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared.

A game ball is shot from the ball shooting device and struck into the game area in response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball shooting device. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that it is guided to the second path in the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that the game ball is guided to the first path in the left game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first path in the left game area, and allows game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the second path in the right game area, and allows game balls flowing down the second path to enter. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B may be able to enter the game ball flowing down the first path in the left game area. The variable winning ball device 6B may be arranged such that a game ball flowing down the second path in the right side gaming area is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first path in the left side gaming area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second path in the right game area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the normal reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 20 can be executed as the normal pattern game. The passage gate 41 can be configured as a normal symbol operation opening into which game balls can enter. In this case, the gate switch 21 can be configured as a normal symbol operation port switch capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the normal symbol operation port.

The special variable winning ball device 50 forms a large winning opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning opening solenoid 82 as a special electric accessory. An upper portion of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage having a passage width in the front-rear direction to the extent that game balls can pass therethrough. This guide path slopes down from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on both sides of the extended passage, the front side and the back side. At the center of the guide path, there is formed an accessory entrance that serves as a big winning entrance. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front-rear direction is provided as a large winning opening opening/closing member at a position where the large winning opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize winning ball device 50, a fixing member 53 forming a fixed passage is provided in a portion of the guide passage where the large winning opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by a large winning prize opening solenoid 82, and can move forward and backward to open and close the accessory entrance that serves as a large winning prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a game ball that enters from the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Also, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. Above the V winning area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member is provided as a V winning opening opening/closing member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by a specific area solenoid 83 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning area 51 . A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. A game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24 . A game ball that has not passed through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. Both the game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 and the game ball that has passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are detected by the outlet switch 26, and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. is discharged to

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstructing nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for the game machine, and a game effect lamp 9 for lighting effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. there is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED. At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

At the lower right position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball-hitting device. The hitting operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball put out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device. A serving tray is provided. The hitting ball supply plate is also called an upper plate. Below the upper plate, there is provided a prize ball storage plate in which the awarded balls flow down and are stored when the upper plate is full. The prize ball storage plate is also called a lower plate.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A can be gripped and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed and pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B shown in FIG. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as player's operations, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the previous normal game is being executed, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed, so the normal game based on the passage cannot be performed. , for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number, such as "4". In the general pattern game, when a specific normal pattern such as a general pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, when a normal pattern other than the normal per pattern, such as a normal pattern losing pattern, is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". In the case of the "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state or an enlarged open state for a predetermined period of time. At this time, the second start winning opening becomes an open state or an enlarged open state.

When a game ball enters through a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be started. When a game ball enters through a second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B can be started. In addition, during the period during which the special game is being executed, or during the period during which the game ball is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, even if the game ball enters the start prize opening and the start prize is generated, Since the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately, the special game based on the starting prize is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number such as "4". In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol such as a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". On the other hand, when a predetermined special symbol different from the big win symbol, such as a small winning symbol, is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "small winning". Also, when a special symbol different from the big win symbol or the small win symbol such as a lost symbol is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "loss". Furthermore, when a special pattern different from a big hit pattern, a small hit pattern, and a losing pattern, such as a time saving pattern, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time saving". . The special pattern may not include the time saving pattern. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include "time saving".

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the big winning game state, the big winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is, for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, until the timing when a predetermined period of time elapses or the timing when the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period during which the large winning opening can be controlled to be open is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in the big winning game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times, such as 15 times or 2 times, is reached. In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

When the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", it includes a plurality of big win types. For example, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state such as the opening mode of the big winning port such as the number of rounds and the upper limit of the opening period, the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state is set to a plurality of different settings, and the jackpot is set according to each setting. A type is specified. A plurality of jackpot types may include a part or all of a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained. Alternatively, the prize balls that can be obtained may include the same level of jackpot types. The control to the big win game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "big win" is also called a big win in the pattern, a big win by the special pattern, a big win in the variable display, or a direct hit.

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state. In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big winning openings can be opened in a similar manner by sharing the number of times of opening and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in an opening mode different from the big winning game state. Similar to the big hit type, even when the display result of the special symbol is "small hit", a plurality of small hit types may be included. The big hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big winning opening in the small winning game state is also called starting operation. When the game ball is in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened to become the big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24. A condition for generating a big win is established, and control to a big win game state becomes possible. Controlling to the big win game state based on the occurrence of the V prize by the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small win game state is also called the big win via the small win.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state corresponding to the jackpot type. Further, in the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "time saving", the game state is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the jackpot game state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is likely to pass through the second start winning opening is also called base control. Base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high-based control, the time-saving state may include mid-based control. Medium base control is base control in which a game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning opening than in low base control, but more difficult to pass through the second start winning opening than in high base control. The game state in which the middle base control is performed is also called a middle base state. A game state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also called high opening control.

In the case of the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, the time-saving design can be stopped and displayed as a display result of the special design. However, in the medium base state and the high base state, even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of the special pattern, the base control based on the time saving pattern is not performed, and the medium base state or the high base state is not performed. A new control transition to the high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time compared to the normal state is possible. Accordingly, the time saving state is also referred to as a time shortening state.

Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols such as the second special symbol is improved, it is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is the variable probability state, in addition to the time-saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. Accordingly, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. The probability variable state is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state, because the variable probability state is a state in which the special symbol variation efficiency is improved and the "big win" is likely to occur. The time-saving state and probability variable state are continued until any one of the predetermined end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and control to the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut. The time-saving state of cutting the number of times is also called the time-saving state of cutting the number of times. The probability-variable state of the number-of-times cutting is also called a number-of-times-cutting probability variation.

The normal game state is an advantageous state such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, a predetermined state such as a small win game state, and a game state that is not included in special states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In the normal state, the probability that the display result in the normal game is "normal game", the probability that the display result in the special game is "big hit", etc. are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. It is in play state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a control state after executing the initial setting process without executing a predetermined recovery process after power-on, such as when the system is reset.

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the variable probability state as the game state.

After the small winning game state is finished, there are two cases: a case where the game state is controlled to the big winning game state based on the occurrence of the V winning prize, and a case where the game state before entering the small winning game state is not changed without the occurrence of the V winning prize. be. However, when the display result of the special game is "small hit" and the special game is executed a predetermined number of times in the cut, the control of the time saving state and the variable probability state ends and the normal state may occur. . In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the small winning game state as the game state. That is, the display result of the special symbols may not include the "minor hit".

It may be possible to control the game state to the time saving state when the time saving condition based on the number of execution times of the variable display is satisfied. Such a time-saving state is also called relief time-saving. The time-saving condition is that after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, after the occurrence of a big hit, or after the display result of the special figure game becomes "time-saving", even if variable display is executed for a specific number of times, a new big-hit game state or When control to a time saving state is not performed, what is necessary is just to be the conditions which can be established.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. This effect includes an effect for notifying the progress of the game and an effect for exciting the game. These effects include displaying various effects images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and operating the stick controller. Vibration of 31A or push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it can be executed using any production device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L provided on the screen of the image display device 5, At 5C and 5R, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. When the finalized special symbols that are the display result in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are stop-displayed, the finalized performance symbols that are the display result are stop-displayed in the variable display of the performance symbols. The fixed effect pattern is composed of a combination of three effect patterns corresponding to the "left", "middle" and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. During the period from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols to the end thereof, the display mode in the variable display of the performance symbols may be the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is a mode in which, when the performance symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the performance symbols that have not yet stopped continue to fluctuate. . The fact that the display mode in the variable display of the production pattern is the ready-to-win mode is also said to be the ready-to-win.

The ready-to-win effect can be executed in response to the variable display of the effect pattern becoming the ready-to-win mode. The pachinko game machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects so that the ratio of the display result of the variable display to be a "jackpot" differs when the effect modes are different. The ratio of "big win" corresponding to the effect mode is also called "big win reliability" and "big win expectation". The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal ready-to-win and super ready-to-win with higher reliability of big win than normal ready-to-win. In addition, a short reach and a long reach whose execution time is longer than the short reach may be included in correspondence with the execution time of the reach effect.

When the display result of the special symbols is "big hit", the fixed performance symbols that are a predetermined big win combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the performance symbol display result. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same production pattern, for example, a production pattern showing the number "7", is aligned and on a predetermined effective line. displayed to stop. In the case of a ``variable probability big win'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big winning game state, odd-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``7'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. In the case of a ``non-probability variable big win'' which is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game state, even-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``6'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is also referred to as the "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd production design is also referred to as a probability variable design. The even-numbered production pattern is also called a non-variable pattern or a normal pattern. After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special pattern becomes a ``small hit'', the fixed performance pattern that becomes a predetermined small win combination is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a stopped manner as the display result of the performance pattern. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same performance symbols, such as performance symbols indicating numbers other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. May be paused on top. A common fixed performance symbol may be stop-displayed depending on whether the display result of the special symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit".

When the display result of the special design becomes "losing", there is a case where the display result is not displayed in the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the production design, and the display result is stopped. In this case, as a result of displaying the performance symbols, the fixed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach mode is also called non-reach loss. When the display result of the special symbol becomes "losing", the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped after the ready-to-win effect is executed. In this case, as a result of the display of the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations other than the big winning combination and the small winning combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win state is reached is also called a ready-to-win failure.

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko game machine 1 include display corresponding to variable display such as pending display and active display. In addition, for example, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit during the variable display of the effect symbols. The notice effect includes the variable notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display during execution, and the pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display before the execution of which the execution is suspended. may contain. The pre-reading advance notice effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display such as the suspended display and the active display to a mode different from the normal one.

On the screen of the image display device 5, once the performance symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then the variable display is restarted, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. It may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that makes it look like. The pseudo-continuous performance may be set so that the reliability of the big win is higher when the number of times of re-fluctuation for resuming the variable display after temporarily stopping the performance pattern is larger than when the number of times of re-fluctuation is small. . The variable display of the performance symbols may include a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed before the ready-to-win state is established and a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed after the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, the pseudo-continuous performance may be executed at a plurality of timings.

During the control of the big-hit game state, it is possible to execute the performance during the big-hit game for notifying the big-hit game state. The effect during the big win may include the effect of notifying the number of rounds and the promotion effect of suggesting or notifying that the advantage of the big win game state is improved. During the control of the small-hit game state, it is possible to execute a performance during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state. By executing a common performance during the control of the big win game state and during the control of the small win game state, the player can determine whether the current game state is the big win game state or the small win game state. It may be made unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

In a non-game state in which no special game or the like is executed and the game is not progressing, an effect image for demonstration can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The effect image for demonstration is also called a demo image. The display of the demonstration image is also called demonstration display. The production by the demonstration display is also called a customer waiting demonstration production.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 includes, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17 and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states such as execution of special game with management of suspension, execution of general game with management of suspension, big hit game state, small hit game state, time saving state, probability variable state, etc. including the migration of The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100 , a switch circuit 110 and a solenoid circuit 111 .

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number It can be configured with a circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 . A part or all of the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the random number circuit 104 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be built in the game control microcomputer 100. good. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . Various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, starter switches such as a first starter switch 22A and a second starter switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data which ROM101 memorize|stores includes the table data etc. which comprise the table used for a variation pattern, production|presentation control command, other various setting, determination, and determination. The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents stored in part or all of the storage area so as to be recoverable within a predetermined period of time even when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes storage areas capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to programs stored in the ROM 101 .

A random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. A random number used to control the progress of a game is also called a game random number. Part or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by CPU 103 .

FIG. 3 shows an example of game random numbers. The game random numbers are a random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, a random number MR1-2 for winning symbols, a random number MR1-3 as an initial value for winning symbols, and a random number MR2-1 for normal symbols per symbol. , a random number MR2-2 as an initial value for the normal per-symbol pattern, a random number MR3-1 for the normal pattern variation pattern, a random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing effect, and a random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern. , and random numbers MR3-4 for variation patterns.

The random number MR1-1 for determining the special design determines the display result of the special design, such as whether the display result of the special design is a "big hit" or whether the display result of the special design is a "small hit". Used for judgment. The random number MR1-2 for the winning pattern is a fixed special pattern such as a big hit pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "big hit" or a small hit pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "small hit". Used to select from multiple special symbols. The random number MR1-3, which is the initial value for the winning symbol, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR1-2. The normal symbol hit random number MR2-1 is used to select a fixed normal symbol to be displayed when the display result is "general hit" in the variable display of normal symbols from a plurality of normal symbols. The random number MR2-2, which is the initial value for the normal per-symbol pattern, is used to set the initial value of the random number MR2-1. The random number MR3-1 for the normal symbol variation pattern is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern to one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random number MR3-2 for selecting the loss effect is used to select whether or not the ready-to-win mode is set in the variable display of the effect symbols when the display result of the special symbol is "loss". The random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is used to select the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The variation pattern type of the special symbol is a group in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is classified in advance based on, for example, the effect mode during the variable display of the effect symbol, and is configured to include one or more variation patterns. Just do it. The random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern is used to select a special symbol variation pattern.

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when performing various judgments and decisions based on random numbers, such as numerical data indicating game random numbers. Even when random numbers are not used, a necessary table may be read out from the ROM 101 and referenced to perform various determinations, decisions, settings, and the like.

The I/O 105 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 includes an input port to which various signals are input and an output port to which various signals are output. Various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110 . Various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 are the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, A signal for controlling the normal figure holding display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal for driving the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc., may be included.

The main board 11 outputs an effect control command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by the game control microcomputer 100 . The effect control command is a command that designates or notifies the progress of the game or the like. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include commands for specifying various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display result of the special game, the winning type, and the variation pattern, for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, and winning. , the number of pending memories, the game state, and a command specifying the occurrence of an error.

The performance control board 12 is a sub side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function capable of receiving a performance control command and controlling the performance based on the received performance control command. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 are various effects according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various notifications such as error notification and power failure recovery notification. The performance control board 12 includes a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123 . This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determination of the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data of various tables, and uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes mainly display-related effects based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. control possible. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 . The sound designation signal designates sounds to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates a lighting mode or an extinguishing mode of the game effect lamp 9 . By supplying the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, it becomes possible to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32 or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32 . A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the effect control board 12 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. A random number used to control the execution of a performance is also called a random number for performance. The effect random number may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 reads various tables from the ROM 121 and refers to them when performing various determinations and determinations based on random numbers, such as numerical data indicating the value of random numbers for effect. Even if the random number value is not used, the effect control CPU 120 may read a necessary table from the ROM 121 and refer to it to perform various determinations, determinations, settings, and the like.

The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output ports of the I/O 125 are an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for an audio designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. and an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and controls the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. 9 is lit or extinguished. In this manner, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. FIG. It should be noted that control of sound output and lamp lighting and extinguishing, such as supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, and control of the movable bodies 32, such as supply of signals for operating the movable bodies 32, are partly performed by the effect control CPU 120. Or you may make it run all. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 2, one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply electric power from an AC power supply such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have. The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending power-on by operating the power switch 91 . A switch circuit 110 on the main board 11 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes main processing for game control.

FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing P_MAIN for game control executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11 . When the main process P_MAIN for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 executes power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON (step S1), and then executes RWM check process P_RWM_CHK (step S2). In the power supply start corresponding process P_POWER_ON of step S1, initial setting of the game control microcomputer 100 and the like can be executed in response to the start of power supply in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. The initial setting of the game control microcomputer 100 may include output port initialization, interrupt vector setting, built-in device register setting, and specific register setting. The RWM check processing P_RWM_CHK in step S2 includes checksum calculation processing, and compares the checksum data obtained as a processing result with the data stored in the checksum buffer. Judge that the content is normal.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a predetermined restoration condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be established when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, the checksum buffer has normal stored data, and the stored contents in the RAM 102 as a backup RAM are normal. . When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. The checksum buffer stores the checksum data calculated by the checksum calculation process when the backup judgment time is measured by the backup monitoring timer at the time of the previous power failure. If the measured value of the backup monitoring timer does not match the specific value corresponding to the backup determination time, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be data stored in the game work area in the RAM 102 which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied may be determined based on the result of confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors by the RWM check process P_RWM_CHK of step S2.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET is executed (step S4). The setting process P_BACKUP_SET at the time of backup enables transmission of the effect control command corresponding to the time of backup from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 using the command transmission table at the time of backup. The backup setting process P_BACKUP_SET enables initialization by clearing the process code, timer, counter, and flag specified by the backup setting table.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET is executed (step S5). The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET makes it possible to transfer clear data to a game work area, which is a work area in the RAM 102 . Thereby, the game work area in the RAM 102 is initialized. Then, the initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables transmission of the effect control command corresponding to the initialization from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 using the command transmission table at the time of initialization. The initialization setting process P_INIT_SET enables initialization by clearing the buffers, timers, pointers, and counters specified by the initialization setting table.

Thereafter, a control start setting process P_STACON is executed (step S6). The control start setting processing P_STACON may include wait processing. The wait process executes a loop process and waits until a set waiting time elapses, so that the sub-board such as the performance control board 12 can be reliably activated. Also, the control start setting process P_STACON may include a specific number of times command transmission process or a chip individual number information command transmission process. The specified number of times command transmission processing enables transmission of a performance control command designating the count value of the specified number of times counter from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific number counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and may be capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number corresponding to the time saving condition. The command transmission processing for chip individual number information enables transmission of an effect control command designating the stored value of the chip individual number register from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The individual chip number register is included in the built-in register of the game control microcomputer 100, and may store different values assigned to each chip as individual chip numbers.

The control start setting process P_STACON may include an out-of-area process at startup. The start-time outside area processing is a process executed by reading a program stored in the non-game program area of the ROM 101 corresponding to start-up due to the start of power supply in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The start-up outside area processing may be, for example, performance display RWM initial value setting processing. The performance display RWM initial value setting process makes it possible to set initial values for initial display by the 7-segment LEDs constituting the performance display monitor. The performance display monitor may be mounted on the main board 11, for example, and may display the contents of the set values and the contents of the base. The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages, such as 6 stages, when the setting of the pachinko game machine 1 is changeable, and the probability that the display result of the special symbol will be a "big hit". be configurable. The base is divided by the number of game balls launched into the game area by the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls pass through each of the winning openings, such as the start winning opening, the general winning opening, and the big winning opening. Calculated.

After the control start setting process P_STACON in step S6, timer interrupt counter setting is performed (step S7). In step S7, the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs at predetermined time intervals, such as 4 [ms (milliseconds)]. After that, the main process P_MAIN for game control enters a loop process. In this loop processing, interrupt prohibition is set (step S8), random number update processing P_TFINIT for initial value determination is executed (step S9), and after loop outside region processing P_REGOUT is executed (step S10), interrupt permission is executed. is set (step S11), and the process returns to step S8. The CPU 103 is enabled to execute timer interrupt processing each time an interrupt request signal is input to the CPU 103 from the PTC when the interrupt is enabled. As a result, the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt processing each time a predetermined period of time, such as 4 [ms], elapses.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing P_PCT for game control. In the timer interrupt process P_PCT shown in FIG. 5, a power-off process P_POWER_OFF is executed (step S51). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the illegal activity monitoring flag is "0" (step S52). The fraud monitoring flag is set to "1" corresponding to the on state when magnetism is detected by the magnet sensor or radio waves are detected by the frame radio wave sensor. Otherwise, the fraud monitor flag is set to '0', which corresponds to an off state.

If the fraudulent activity monitoring flag is "1" (step S52; No), game stop processing P_GAME_STOP is executed (step S53). The game stop processing P_GAME_STOP may be processing that initializes the output port and turns off the output of the connection confirmation signal. The connection confirmation signal is transmitted from the main board 11 to the payout control board, and when it is in the OFF state, execution of the payout process in the payout control board is stopped.

If the illegality monitoring flag is "0" (step S52; Yes), the switch process P_SW is executed (step S54), the switch error notification process P_CON_CHK is executed (step S55), and the random number update process P_RANDOM is executed. (Step S56), a random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination is executed (Step S57). In addition, special symbol process processing P_TPROC is executed (step S58), normal symbol process processing P_FPROC is executed (step S59), information output processing P_JYOUHOU is executed (step S60), prize ball processing P_PAY is executed (step S61 ), and the display process P_HYOUZI is executed (step S62). Further, other timer interrupt handling processing is executed (step S63). Thereafter, after the interrupt permission is set (step S64), the timer interrupt process P_PCT ends.

In the power-off process P_POWER_OFF in step S51, the power confirmation signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 is determined, and the checksum calculation process and the like at the time of power-off can be executed. The switch processing P_SW in step S54 determines the state of the input port and enables update of the switch-on buffer and the like. The switch error notification process P_CON_CHK in step S55 can update the count value of the sensor ON counter specified by the switch error notification determination table, for example, and when the count value reaches the sensor abnormality error determination value, the error notification display be executable. The random number update process P_RANDOM in step S56 allows software random numbers among game random numbers to be updated by software. The random number update process P_TFINIT for initial value determination in step S57 makes it possible to update the random number used as the random number initial value among the game random numbers by software.

The special symbol process processing P_TPROC in step S58 includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and the game state, such as management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, and control of the game state. be The normal symbol process processing P_FPROC of step S59 includes normal symbol processing such as management of execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, opening and closing control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "normal pattern hit", etc. It includes processing related to variable display and state control of the second start winning opening. Information output processing P_JYOUHOU in step S60 sets an information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability variation information. The jackpot information indicates the number of occurrences of jackpots and the like. The starting information indicates the number of starting winnings and the like. The probability variation information indicates, for example, the number of times the probability variation state has occurred. The prize ball processing P_PAY in step S61 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table is used to determine whether the switch is turned on, and when the switch is detected to be on, the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter are updated. The prize ball control process selects the process corresponding to the prize ball process code, and controls the payout of the prize balls based on the detection of the game balls. The display processing P_HYOUZI in step S62 sets the display related to the first suspension indicator 25A, the second suspension indicator 25B, the normal diagram suspension indicator 25C, and various other status indicator lamps.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executable in step S58 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process P_TPROC. The CPU 103 sets the flag corresponding to the first start winning prize in the special symbol process process P_TPROC (step S101). The setting of the flag corresponding to the first starting winning prize reflects the state of the first starting opening switch 22A included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logic operation instruction or the like. At this time, the ON state of the zero flag in the flag register indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is OFF state. On the other hand, the fact that the zero flag is in the OFF state indicates that the first start winning corresponding flag is in the ON state. Subsequently, a first start winning prize table is set by a transfer command for setting a table pointer (step S102). After that, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the first starting prize is ON (step S103). When the first starting winning flag is ON (step S103; Yes), the starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S104).

When the first start winning correspondence flag is OFF corresponding to step S103 (step S103; No), after the starting opening switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in step S104, the second start winning correspondence flag is set (step S105). . The setting of the flag corresponding to the second starting winning a prize reflects the state of the second starting opening switch 22B included in the switch-on buffer in the flag register of the CPU 103 by executing a logic operation instruction or the like. At this time, the fact that the zero flag in the flag register is ON indicates that the flag corresponding to the second start winning prize is OFF. On the other hand, the fact that the zero flag is off indicates that the second start winning correspondence flag is on. Subsequently, a second start winning prize table is set by a transfer command for setting a table pointer (step S106). After that, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the second starting prize is ON (step S107). When the second starting winning corresponding flag is ON (step S107; Yes), the starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed (step S108).

The starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON of step 104 uses the first starting opening winning prize table set in step S102, and when the first reserved memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first reserved memory number and the total reserved The memory number is updated by adding 1, and the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for the variation pattern. After extracting -4 and storing them in the respective random number buffers, they are transferred to the first special symbol holding buffer. In addition, using the first reserved memory information designation command transmission table, the first reserved memory information designation command designating the number of first reserved memories can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.例文帳に追加Then, a value indicating "1" is stored in the start-up winning buffer as the start-up winning designation value.

The starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the second starting opening winning table set in step S106, and if the second reserved memory number is less than the upper limit number, the second reserved memory number and the total reserved The memory number is updated by adding 1, and the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing effect, the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type, and the random number MR3 for the variation pattern. After extracting -4 and storing them in the respective random number buffers, they are transferred to the second special symbol holding buffer. In addition, by using the second reserved memory information designation command transmission table, the second reserved memory information designation command designating the second reserved memory number can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁Then, a value indicating "2" is stored in the start-up winning buffer as the start-up winning designation value.

In step S104 and step S108, it is possible to execute a common starting port switch passage process P_TZU_ON. On the other hand, the starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S104 uses the first starting opening winning table set in step S102, while the starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON in step S108 uses the first starting opening winning table set in step S106. 2 Use the start-up prize table. In this way, the common starting opening switch passing process P_TZU_ON is executed using different starting opening winning tables. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole and when entering the second starting winning hole, it is possible to set different data and control by common processing. In addition, the starting opening switch passage process P_TZU_ON may include a win effect process using the extracted game random number.

If the second start winning correspondence flag is off corresponding to step S107 (step S107; No), after the start opening switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in step S108, a special symbol process processing jump by a transfer command to set a pointer A table is set (step S109). The special symbol process processing jump table is an address management table that enables selection and execution of processing corresponding to the read value of the special symbol process code. The special symbol process code can be updated to any one of 00 [H] to 0B [H] corresponding to the progress of game control in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is also called a special symbol process code. Here, [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. Note that [B] may indicate a binary number.

Following step S109, a special symbol process code is loaded by a transfer command for reading stored data (step S110). Next, by executing the 2-byte data selection process P_ABXEXEC (step S111), the address of the process selected corresponding to the special design process code is acquired. The address acquired at this time is set in the pointer. After that, by executing the process pointed to by the pointer according to the subroutine call command (step S112), the process selected corresponding to the special symbol process code can be executed. When the selected process ends and returns to the special symbol process process P_TPROC by the return command, this special symbol process process P_TPROC also ends and returns to the timer interrupt process P_PCT for game control by the return command.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example TT01 of a special symbol process processing jump table used in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC. The special symbol process processing jump table includes table data that can set the address of the process selected in correspondence with the special symbol process code to the internal register of the CPU 103 used as a pointer. The special symbol process processing jump table of configuration example TT01 includes special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL when the special symbol process code is 00 [H] and special symbol variation processing P_TSTART when the special symbol process code is 01 [H]. And, special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP when the special symbol process code is 02 [H], small hit opening pre-processing P_TLFAN when the special symbol process code is 03 [H], and special symbol process code is 04 [ H] during small hit opening process P_TLOPEN, small hit post-opening process P_TLCLSF when special symbol process code is 05 [H], and small hit when special symbol process code is 06 [H] Eject ball waiting processing P_TLOUT, small winning end processing P_TLEND when the special symbol process code is 07 [H], large winning opening pre-processing P_TINT when the special symbol process code is 08 [H], special Large winning opening opening process P_TOPEN when the symbol process code is 09 [H], large winning opening post-opening process P_TCLSF when the special symbol process code is 0A [H], and special symbol process code 0B [ H] and the table data that can set the address value corresponding to the jackpot end process P_TEND in the pointer.

The special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL includes determining whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reservation information, determining the special symbol display result using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, To determine fixed special symbols to be stopped and displayed in variable display of special symbols and to determine a variation pattern of the special symbols. The special figure display result includes ``big win'', ``small win'', ``losing'', etc., and when it is determined to be ``big win'', control is made to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. is determined. Further, when the display result of the special pattern is "big hit", any one of a plurality of types of jackpot game states with different degrees of advantage for the player is selected in correspondence with the jackpot pattern to be a confirmed special pattern. It is determined whether the state is controlled. Therefore, by executing the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is possible to decide which one to control. Furthermore, the CPU 103 can determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns by executing the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL.

The special symbol variation process P_TSTART measures the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. It is possible to determine whether or not The special symbol stop processing P_TSTOP measures the elapsed time after the special symbol stops changing in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and determines whether or not the symbol stop time has passed. enable The symbol stop time may be set as the time to stop and display the special symbol when it is determined that the special symbol variation time has elapsed in the special symbol variation process P_TSTART. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special symbol process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the special symbol display result. For example, when the special figure display result is "big hit", the special symbol process code can be updated to 08 [H], and when the special figure display result is "small hit", the special symbol process code can be changed to 03 [H]. It is possible to update, and if the special symbol process code can be updated to 00 [H] when the special figure display result is "loss".

Small hit opening pre-processing P_TLFAN, small hit opening middle processing P_TLOPEN, small hit opening post-processing P_TLCLSF, small hit discharge ball standby processing P_TLOUT, small hit end processing P_TLEND are processes for controlling the progress of the game in the small hit game state is. The big winning hole opening pre-processing P_TINT, the big winning hole opening process P_TOPEN, the big winning hole opening post-processing P_TCLSF, and the jackpot ending process P_TEND are processes for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process.

FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing main processing S_MAIN for effect control executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control board 12 . When the main process S_MAIN for effect control shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control initialization process S_INIT (step S71). The effect control initialization process S_INIT includes clearing of the RAM 122, setting of various initial values, register setting for the timer circuit mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Subsequently, an initial operation control process S_SYOKI is executed (step S72). The initial motion control process S_SYOKI makes it possible to control the initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position, control for confirming a predetermined motion, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined period of time, for example 2 [ms (milliseconds)], elapses based on the register setting for the timer circuit. When the timer interrupt flag is turned off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated to wait.

When the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), the command analysis process S_COMMAND is executed (step S75), and the effect control process process S_CPROC is executed (step S76), the effect random number update process S_RANDOM is executed (step S77), and the effect output process S_OUT is executed (step S78). After executing other timer interrupt handling processing (step S79), the process returns to step S73.

Command analysis processing S_COMMAND of step S75 enables reading of the production control command stored in the production control command reception buffer, and setting and control corresponding to the read production control command. By executing the command analysis process S_COMMAND, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 by storing data indicating the state of the flag, data stored in the register, and other work areas of the RAM 122. Any stored data in , etc., can be updated. The effect control process processing S_CPROC in step S76 includes, for example, the display of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting or To control execution of performance using various performance devices including turning off and drive control of a movable body 32.例文帳に追加Control contents of effects using various effects devices can be judged, determined, set, etc., based on effects control commands transmitted from the main board 11, execution results of processes by the effects control CPU 120, and the like. good. The effect random number update process S_RANDOM in step S77 enables at least part of the effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 12 to be updated by executing a program as software.

FIG. 9(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S76 shown in FIG. 8 as the effect control process process S_CPROC. The effect control CPU 120 executes a look-ahead effect setting process S_SAKI_SET in the effect control process (step S151). The look-ahead effect setting process S_SAKI_SET enables determination, determination, setting, etc. regarding the execution of the look-ahead prediction effect based on the effect control command at the time of start winning, which is transmitted from the main substrate 11, for example. In addition, the look-ahead effect setting process S_SAKI_SET makes it possible to update the pending display based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After the look-ahead effect setting process S_SAKI_SET in step S151, the effect control process process jump table is set by the transfer command for setting the pointer (step S152). The performance control process processing jump table is an address management table that enables selection and execution of processing corresponding to the read value of the performance control process code. The effect control process code can be updated to any one of 00 [H] to 0A [H] corresponding to the progress of the effect control in the pachinko game machine 1, and is also called the effect process code. The performance control process code is loaded by a transfer command for reading stored data (step S153). Corresponding to the effect control process code acquired in this way, the address of the selected process is set to the effect control pointer (step S154). Therefore, by executing the process pointed to by the effect control pointer (step S115), the process selected corresponding to the effect control process code can be executed.

FIG. 9(B) shows a configuration example TT02 of the effect control process processing jump table used in the effect control process processing S_CPROC. The performance control process processing jump table includes table data capable of setting the address of the process selected corresponding to the performance control process code in a register used as a performance control pointer. The effect control process processing jump table of the configuration example TT02 includes the variation pattern command waiting process when the effect control process code is 00 [H], and the effect symbol variation start process when the effect control process code is 01 [H]. , production design change processing when the production control process code is 02 [H], production design fluctuation stop processing when the production control process code is 03 [H], and production control process code 04 [H ], a small hit open process when the effect control process code is 05 [H], and a small hit end effect process when the effect control process code is 06 [H]. , jackpot display processing when the production control process code is 07 [H], round processing when the production control process code is 08 [H], and production control process code when the production control process code is 09 [H] Table data that can set an address value corresponding to the post-round process and the jackpot end effect process when the effect control process code is 0A[H] is included in the effect control pointer.

Variation pattern command reception wait processing makes it possible to determine whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command is received, the effect control process code is updated to 01 [H] corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process, and when it is determined that the variation pattern designation command is not received, the demonstration Make the display controllable. The performance symbol variation start processing enables the start of the performance at the time of variation corresponding to the special symbol game. For example, in response to a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, it is possible to select a performance pattern used for controlling performance during variation and to start updating a performance process timer for measuring performance execution time. The performance symbol change process makes it possible to control the switching timing of each performance element constituting the performance pattern, and to determine whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the measured value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has passed, the performance control process code is updated to 03 [H] corresponding to the performance symbol variation stop processing. The production design fluctuation stop processing is based on the fact that the production execution time has elapsed or the production design confirmation command has been received, and the end condition of the production at the time of fluctuation is satisfied. To enable display control of a performance result corresponding to a pattern. At this time, the production control process code is updated and various settings are performed according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the effect control process code can be updated to 07 [H], and when the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the effect control process code can be updated to 04 [H]. ], and the effect control process code can be updated to 00 [H] when the display result of the variable display is "loss".

The small-hit display process, the small-hit opening process, and the small-hit end production process are processes for controlling the progress of the production corresponding to the small-hit game state. The big hit display process, the mid-round process, the post-round process, and the big hit end effect process are processes for controlling the progress of the effect corresponding to the big win game state.

(Modified example of basic explanation, etc.)
The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operations in the basic explanation and other explanations, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the embodiment, and some of the technical features described in the embodiment can solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the configuration of. In the embodiment, when a matter that is a more specific concept is described, an invention of a generic concept using a matter of the same family or a similar kind, or an invention of a generic concept using a common property is regarded as the claimed invention. It may have some of the structures and characteristics described in the embodiments so as to be included and solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, or an enclosed type game that encloses game media and gives points when winning occurs. machine.

Only one type of pattern such as a sign indicating "-" may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of this pattern. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, as a display result, the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed, and a non-display state may be set in which no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be provided with a configuration in which the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed corresponding to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value that is set, it may be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot and the ball output rate. As a specific example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. lower. In this case, if 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . The setting suggesting performance may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by an arbitrary performance, and may suggest the set value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may suggest a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

The invention relating to the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. It is possible to execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for realizing various controls including the progress of a game and the execution of effects can be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a game machine such as the pachinko game machine 1 via a detachable recording medium. It may be possible, or it may be possible to distribute and provide it by installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, it may be provided with a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line or the like, and can be distributed or provided by downloading programs and data from the external device. The mode of execution of games and presentations may be executable by installing a detachable recording medium, or programs and data downloaded via a communication line etc. may be temporarily stored in an internal memory or the like. or can be directly executed using hardware resources in an external device on a network connected via a communication line, or another computer device A game or performance may be executed by exchanging data via a network.

Expressions such as "high", "low", "different" when comparing various ratios such as the determination ratio of processing and data, the execution ratio of effects, etc. are the ratio of "0%" or "100%" may include being For example, one decision result or execution content may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of "0%", or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 002AK)
FIG. 10A shows a configuration example AKP0 of screen display on the image display device 5 regarding the characteristic part 002AK. In the configuration example AKP0, the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with an active display area AKA0, a reserved display area AKB0, and a small pattern display area AKC0. The active display area AKA0 makes it possible to execute active display by displaying effect images corresponding to the variable display being executed. The suspended display area AKB0 makes it possible to execute suspended display by displaying an effect image in correspondence with variable display whose execution is suspended. In this way, the active display area AKA0 and the reserved display area AKB0 enable display of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display or the active display and the reserved display, which are specific displays, as displays related to the variable display. The reserved display area AKB0 includes a first reserved display area capable of executing a first reserved display by displaying a performance image that enables recognition of the first reserved memory number, and a display of a performance image that enables recognition of the second reserved memory number. and a second pending display area capable of performing a second pending display by.

In the active display area AKA0, active display based on the suspended display erased (digested) in the suspended display area AKB0 corresponding to the start of the special game is started. In the pending display area AKB0, for example, the pending display associated with the pending numbers "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end is possible, and the pending display is left aligned. It is sufficient if the display area is configured. The active displays that can be displayed in the active display area AKA0 may have the same shapes, patterns, colors, or a combination of all or part of them as the reserved displays in the reserved display area AKB0. For example, the active display may be one in which an effect image common to the suspended display can be displayed larger than each suspended display. The display mode of the active display may be changeable to a display mode different from that of the suspension display by executing the active display change effect. In the active display area AKA0, for example, an effect image showing a pedestal may be displayed below the active display so that the active display can be distinguished from the suspended display and recognized.

The small pattern display area AKC0 is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and is provided at a predetermined position such as the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5, for example. there is In the small symbol display area AKC0, the variable display of the small symbols is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols and the performance symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is reduced in size from the identification information image which is the effect image showing the effect pattern, and variable display can be executed in a display mode in which all or part of each of the identification information images showing the effect pattern is common. Any reduced identification information image may be used. The effect image showing the small pattern may be displayed at a position that is always visible.

FIG. 10-2 relates to the characterizing part 002AK, and shows a configuration example of the start-up winning command included in the effect control command. Steps S104 and S108 included in the special symbol process processing P_TPROC shown in FIG. Then, a performance control command designating the generation of the starting prize can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.例文帳に追加In addition, the start opening switch passage processing P_TZU_ON enables transmission of the effect control command specifying the number of pending memories from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . Furthermore, the starting opening switch passage processing P_TZU_ON executes the winning effect processing using the extracted game random number, thereby sending the effect control command designating the winning determination result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. to be sent. A start winning designation command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for designating the occurrence of starting winning. A reservation storage information designation command is prepared in advance as an effect control command for designating the number of reservations. Winning determination result commands are prepared in advance as effect control commands for designating winning determination results.

FIG. 10-2(A) shows a setting example of the starting point winning designation command, the reservation storage information designation command, and the judgment result command at the time of winning. The starting opening winning designation command includes a command B100 [H] that serves as a first starting opening winning designation command and a command B200 [H] that serves as a second starting opening winning designation command. The reserved storage information designation command includes a command C1XX[H] as a first reserved storage information designation command and a command C2XX[H] as a second reserved storage information designation command. In addition, XX[H] indicates 1-byte data which is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. The reserved storage information specification command may be set with different EXT data such as 00[H] to 04[H] corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The winning determination result command is a command C4XX [H] that can set different EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the winning performance process executed using the game random number.

In the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11, the CPU 103 that executes the starting opening switch passage processing P_TZU_ON of steps S104 and S108 shown in FIG. Control is performed so that a plurality of kinds of performance control commands can be transmitted as hour commands. The starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON of steps S104 and S108 stores the extracted game random numbers as reservation information in the first special symbol reservation buffer and the second special symbol reservation buffer, and uses these game random numbers to produce a winning effect. Make the process executable. In the winning effect process, for example, using a random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination, the display result of the special symbol is controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the "big win" before the variable display is executed. make it possible to determine whether or not The CPU 103, which executes the prize-winning effect process, executes a comparison operation with the big-hit judgment value in order to judge whether or not the value of the random number MR1-1 for judging the special symbol is within the big-hit judging range. At this time, since the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the big hit determination range, the judgment result at the time of winning is set to "big hit". The CPU 103, which executes the start switch passing process P_TZU_ON including such prize-winning effect processing, determines whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed. a possible decision-making tool.

In addition, when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is not within the jackpot determination range, the CPU 103 executing the winning effect process determines that the value of the random number MR3-2 for selecting the loss effect is within the ready-to-win decision range. In order to determine whether or not, a comparison operation with the reach determination determination value is executed. At this time, if the random number MR3-2 for selecting the loss effect is within the reach determination range, further use the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type to determine whether the value is within the super reach determination range. To make the determination, a comparison operation is performed with the super reach determination determination value. In this way, in response to the fact that the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is within the super reach determination range, the determination result at the time of winning is set to "super reach determination at the time of loss". In response to the fact that the random number MR3-3 for selecting the variation pattern type is not within the super reach determination range and the random number MR3-2 for selecting the losing effect is within the reach determination range, the determination result at the time of winning is changed to "reach at the time of losing Set to “Confirm”. In response to the fact that the random number MR3-2 for selecting the loss effect is not within the ready-to-win decision range, the judgment result at the time of winning is set to "general at the time of loss".

FIG. 10-2(B) exemplifies the contents specified by the prize determination result command. Of the winning judgment result commands, among the winning judgment result commands, command C402H, command C403H, and command C404H may be sent when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol judgment is not within the jackpot judgment range. , Notifies the judgment result at the time of winning that the display result of the special game is determined to be "losing" and the control is not made to the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination is within the jackpot determination range, and is controlled to the jackpot game state by determining the display result of the special symbol game as "big hit". Notify the result of judgment at the time of winning. It should be noted that the command C400H notifies that the winning determination is restricted.

FIG. 10-3 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern regarding the characteristic part 002AK. A plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance for the variation pattern corresponding to different special figure variation times and variable display modes of production symbols. The plurality of variation patterns relating to the characteristic portion 002AK include variation patterns corresponding to any of "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", and "reach (hit)". "Non-reach (losing)" is when the variable display of the production pattern does not reach the ready-to-win state and the fixed production pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stopped as a display result, and the variable display result of the production pattern becomes "non-reach loss". be. "Reach (losing)" means that after the variable display of the production pattern has reached the ready state, the fixed production pattern of the ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the production pattern becomes "reach loss". be. "Reach (hit)" is, after the variable display of the production pattern becomes the reach state, the fixed production pattern of the big hit combination (or small hit combination) is displayed stopped, and the variable display result of the production pattern is "big hit" (or It is a case of "small hit").

The variation pattern corresponding to "non-reach loss" is the non-reach variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to "reach loss" is the reach variation pattern, and the variation pattern corresponding to "big hit" or "small hit" is the hit variation pattern. be. The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are also collectively referred to as a loss fluctuation pattern. The reach variation pattern and hit variation pattern include the "normal" variation pattern, in which the display result at the time of the variable display is stopped after executing the reach effect that becomes normal reach, and the super reach after executing the reach effect that becomes normal reach. A "super" variation pattern is included in which the ready-to-win effect develops into a ready-to-win effect, and after the ready-to-win effect to become a super reach is executed, the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed. The ready-to-reach performances that become super ready-to-win include super-A and super-B ready-to-reach performances having different performance modes.

FIG. 10-4 shows a configuration example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. The variation pattern determination table includes a jackpot variation pattern determination table AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), a normal loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B1), and FIG. 10-4 (B2). It includes a time saving medium loss variation pattern determination table AKT03 shown. The big hit variation pattern determination table AKT01 is used when the display result of the special symbol is "big hit". The normal time loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 is used when the display result of the special symbol is "loss" in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed. The loss variation pattern determination table AKT03 during time saving is used when the display result of the special symbol is "loss" in the time saving state in which the time saving control is performed. The normal time loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 and the time saving time loss variation pattern determination table AKT03 are included in the loss variation pattern determination table used when the display result of the special symbol is "loss".

In the special symbol process process P_TPROC shown in FIG. 6, when the special symbol normal process P_TNORMAL corresponding to the special symbol process code 00 [H] is executed in step S112 and the variable display of the special symbol is started, special A variation pattern setting process can be executed after a pattern determination process. The fluctuation pattern setting process uses random numbers MR3-4 for the fluctuation pattern to enable the fluctuation pattern to be determined. Note that the variation pattern setting process can use the random number MR3-2 for selecting the loss effect and the random number MR3-3 for selecting the type of variation pattern in order to determine the variation pattern. However, in order to simplify the explanation here, it is assumed that the variation pattern is determined using the random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern.

When determining the variation pattern, numerical data representing random numbers MR3-4 for the variation pattern are read from the variation pattern buffer. The variation pattern buffer can store numerical data indicating the variation pattern random numbers MR3-4 included in the game random numbers extracted when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs. The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 compares the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern read from the variation pattern buffer with the determination value preset in the selected variation pattern determination table. Then, according to the determination result of which range includes the random number MR3-4 for the variation pattern among the ranges of the determined values assigned to each variation pattern, the variation pattern to be the usage pattern is determined. .

In the jackpot variation pattern determination table AKT01, the number of determination values assigned to the "super" variation patterns such as variation patterns PA3-2 and PA3-3 is the number of "normal" variation patterns such as variation pattern PA3-1. A decision value is assigned to each variation pattern so as to be greater than the number of decision values assigned to the variation patterns. On the other hand, in the losing variation pattern determination tables AKT02 and AKT03, the number of determination values assigned to the "normal" variation pattern such as variation pattern PA2-1 is the variation pattern PA2-2, PA2-3. Determination values are assigned to each variation pattern so as to be greater than the number of determination values assigned to the "super" variation pattern. As a result, when the display result of the variable display is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is executed, the ready-to-reach effect that becomes super reach is not executed even if the ready-to-reach effect that becomes normal reach is executed, and the variable display is displayed. The degree of expectation of big win (reliability of big win) becomes higher than when the display result is stopped and displayed.

The normal loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 includes variation patterns in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the first reserved storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. may be set so that According to such a setting, according to the number of 1st reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design and a production design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. The time-saving loss variation pattern determination table AKT03 includes variation patterns in which the number of assigned determination values differs depending on which value the second reservation storage number is 0, 1, or 2 or more. may be set so that According to such a setting, according to the number of 2nd reservation storage, the average variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of a special design and an effect design should just be made different. Each It suffices if a determined value is assigned to the variation pattern. In addition, in the time saving medium losing variation pattern determination table AKT03, the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern with a longer special figure variation time than the normal time loss variation pattern determination table AKT02 A decision value may be assigned to each variation pattern so that the number of is increased. As a result, when the time saving control is performed, the average variable display time of special symbols and performance symbols can be shortened more than the normal time when the time saving control is not performed.

The advance notice effects executable by the pachinko game machine 1 include character movement effects. The character movement effect includes a movement state display in which the display position of the effect image showing the character displayed corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning can move toward a preset arrival display position. In the moving state display, an effect image showing a character selected from among a plurality of types of characters prepared in advance is displayed, thereby making it possible to execute a character movement effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes. . The character movement effect may be executed in different effects depending on the character type, size, shape, pattern, color, effect display type, size, shape, pattern, color, and any other display mode of the effect image. Just do it. In addition, the character movement effect includes the display of the effect image showing the character on the image display device 5, the output of the sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the light emitting members such as the decorative LED, and the movement of the movable body 32. It may be possible to execute in different rendering modes using any rendering device, such as movement of members or a combination of all or part of them.

A character movement effect can be included in the specific effect. The specific effect is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed by using the game random number extracted when the starting prize is generated, for example. It is an effect that can be started before the variable display that is the object of the determination when it is possible to determine whether or not. It is sufficient that the specific effect can be executed in a different effect mode depending on the display mode of an arbitrary effect image. In addition, the specific effect includes the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the light-emitting members such as the decorative LED, the operation of the movable members including the movable body 32, Alternatively, it may be possible to execute in different rendering modes using any rendering device, such as a combination of all or part of them.

The execution pattern of the character movement effect is the first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the object of judgment, and the effect mode of the character movement effect that is inherited after the variable display that is the object of judgment. and a second pattern that does not. As for the first pattern, a single pattern may be prepared in advance, or a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance. As for the second pattern, a single pattern may be prepared in advance, or a plurality of patterns may be prepared in advance. The timing at which the variable display subject to determination is executed can be included in the specific timing. In this case, the execution pattern of the character movement effect includes a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after the specific timing and a second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the specific timing. be able to.

During the execution of the character movement effect, there are cases where the switching suggestion effect and the character hiding effect are executed. The switching suggestive effect is included in the suggestive effect suggesting switching to the first pattern when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern. The character hiding effect is included in special effects that make the character movement effect invisible. In this way, when the character movement effect that can be started before the variable display that is the object of determination is being executed in the second pattern, a suggestive effect suggesting switching to the first pattern is performed. It is viable. In addition, it is possible to execute a character hiding effect that makes the character movement effect that can be started before the variable display that is the object of determination invisible.

FIG. 10-5 shows a plurality of effect image display examples applicable to the character movement effect, the switching suggestion effect, and the character hiding effect. This effect image display example includes a display image showing four characters CH01 to CH04 and characters CH11 to CH14 whose display modes are different from those of the characters CH01 to CH04. and a display image. In addition, this effect image display example includes a display image forming an effect display CJ01 as a effect image applicable when executing a switching suggestion effect, and a concealment display CK01 as an effect image applicable when executing a character concealing effect. a display image that forms a

The display images of the characters CH01 to CH04 shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A1) to (D1) are based on the effect pattern when the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display to be judged. can be applied when executing a character movement effect. That is, FIG. 10-5(A1) shows an example of an effect image display of character CH01, which is character "A" included in a plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5(B1) shows an effect image display example of the character CH02, which is the character "B" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5(C1) shows an effect image display example of the character CH03, which is the character "C" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance. FIG. 10-5(D1) shows an effect image display example of the character CH04, which is the character "D" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern when there is no inheritance.

The display images of the characters CH11 to CH14 shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A2) to (D2) are based on the production pattern when inheriting the production mode of the character movement production after the variable display that is the object of the determination. can be applied when executing a character movement effect. That is, FIG. 10-5(A2) shows an effect image display example of the character CH11, which is the character "A" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance. FIG. 10-5(B2) shows an effect image display example of the character CH12, which is the character "B" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance. FIG. 10-5(C2) shows an effect image display example of the character CH13, which is the character "C" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance. FIG. 10-5(D2) shows an effect image display example of the character CH14, which is the character "D" included in the plurality of characters, corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance.

Character CH01 shown in FIG. 10-5(A1) and character CH11 shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the display mode is different because at least part of the shape, pattern, and color indicated by the effect image is different. Character CH02 shown in FIG. 10-5(B1) and character CH12 shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the display mode is different because at least part of the shape, pattern, and color indicated by the effect image is different. Character CH03 shown in FIG. 10C1 and character CH13 shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the display mode is different because at least part of the shape, pattern, and color indicated by the effect image is different. Character CH04 shown in FIG. 10D1 and character CH14 shown in FIG. It is sufficient that the display mode is different because at least part of the shape, pattern, and color indicated by the effect image is different. In this way, the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern without inheritance and the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance are the shapes, patterns, and colors indicated by the respective effect images. While part of is common, another part may be different, so that the display modes may be different. The effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern without inheritance and the effect image that can be displayed corresponding to the effect pattern with inheritance are all different in shape, pattern, and color shown by each effect image. By doing so, the display mode may be changed.

FIG. 10-5(E) shows a display image capable of forming the effect display CJ01 in the switching suggestion rendering. After the switching suggestion production is executed, the production pattern of the character movement production is switched from the production pattern without inheritance to the production pattern with inheritance, and the production pattern of the character movement production is switched from the production pattern without inheritance. There may be a case where it is not possible to switch to the production pattern at the time of inheritance. A presentation in which the presentation pattern of the character movement presentation is switched from the presentation pattern without inheritance to the presentation pattern with inheritance is also called a successful switching presentation. A presentation in which the presentation pattern of the character movement presentation cannot be switched from the presentation pattern without inheritance to the presentation pattern with inheritance is also referred to as a switching failure presentation. Whether the switching success rendering is executed or the switching failure rendering is executed, it is sufficient that the switching suggestion rendering can be executed by the display image forming the effect display CJ01. As another example of the switching suggesting effect, a effect image showing a switching suggesting character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and an effect effect is exerted on any one of the characters CH01 to CH04 displayed as a suggesting target. may be performed. The action effect included in such a switching suggestion effect is a display effect suggesting that the effect pattern is switched at a predetermined rate by exerting an action on one of the displayed characters CH01 to CH04. good. In addition to such a display effect, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these It may be possible to execute the effect production using any production device.

In this way, the switching suggestive effect can be switched to the first pattern even if it is not possible to switch to the first pattern after starting execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern. It is sufficient if it can be executed at a predetermined ratio. However, when switching to the first pattern after the character movement effect starts to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern, the switching suggestion effect may always be executed. On the other hand, after the character movement effect starts to be executed in the effect pattern without inheritance, which is the second pattern, when it is not possible to switch to the first pattern, the switching suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined rate. It may or may not be done.

FIG. 10-5(F) shows a display image capable of forming the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect. After the character hiding effect is executed, at the shift timing corresponding to the start of a new variable display, there are three cases: the case of concealment continuation in which the character hiding effect continues, the case of display restart in which the display in the character moving effect is resumed, and the character There may be a display end case where the display in the character movement effect is also ended with the end of the concealment effect. Even if the ratio of whether to continue concealment, resume display, or end display differs depending on whether the effect pattern of the character movement effect is the effect pattern without inheritance or the effect pattern with inheritance. good. In any of the continuation of concealment, resumption of display, and termination of display, it is sufficient that the character concealment effect can be executed by the display image forming the concealment display CK01. As another example of the character hiding effect, a movable member such as the movable body 32 moves to the front side of the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby making the display of the character invisible or difficult to see in the character movement effect. Concealment production may be executed. In addition to such a character hiding effect, sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or all or part of these The concealment notification effect may be executable using any effect device such as a combination.

The notice effect executable by the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include a pending display notice and an active display notice. The pending display notice is an example of a pre-reading notice effect, in which at least one of the pending displays in the pending display area AKB0 is changed to a display mode different from the display mode at normal times, thereby providing a special display corresponding to the pending display. In the variable display of symbols, the display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined rate, and control to the big win game state is announced. By changing the display color of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not started yet to a specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state by the pending display notice, the change in the display mode of the pending display can be recognized. It is only necessary to suggest that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" at a predetermined rate. The predetermined color of the hold display in the normal state may be white, for example. The specific color different from the predetermined color in the normal state of the hold display may include, for example, blue, green, and red. In addition, by changing the display pattern in the hold display to a specific pattern that is different from the predetermined pattern in normal times, it is possible to suggest that the expectation that the display result of the variable display will be a "big hit" is higher than usual. may The predetermined pattern in the normal state of the pending display may be plain, for example. The specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern in the normal state of the reserved display may include, for example, a cherry blossom pattern. By setting a display mode in which a predetermined message is displayed as the pending display, it may be possible to suggest that the degree of expectation that the display result of the variable display is a "big hit" is heightened. A display mode that indicates a predetermined message as a pending display may be any message, such as "chance," "heat," or "extreme heat." A change in the pending display in the pending display advance notice is also referred to as a “suspended display change”. The effect of changing the pending display by the pending display notice is also called "suspended display change effect". A pending display change effect can be included in the change effect.

The active display notice is displayed at a predetermined ratio in the variable display of the special symbols that are being executed when the start condition is established by changing the active display in the active display area AKA0 to a display mode different from the display mode during normal operation. It announces that the result will be "big hit" and that the game will be controlled to the big win game state. Due to the active display notice, the display mode of the active display, which changes according to the variable display being executed, is similar to the case of the pending display notice. It is good if it can be changed into something different. A change in the active display in the active display announcement is also called an "active display change". The effect of changing the active display by the active display notice is also called "active display change effect". The active display change effect can be included in the change effect. Note that the display mode of the active display that can be changed by the active display notice may include a unique display mode that is different from the display mode of the pending display that can be changed by the pending display notice. The display mode of the pending display changeable by the pending display notice may include a unique display mode different from the display mode of the active display changeable by the active display notice.

FIG. 10-6 shows a plurality of effect image display examples applicable to suspension display and active display. This effect image display example includes four display images AKE0 to AKE3 as a plurality of effect images applicable to suspension display and active display, and three display images as a plurality of effect images having unique display modes applicable to active display. It contains display images AKE11 to AKE13. The number of effect images applicable to pending display and active display may be any number of images based on any design.

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a display image AKE0 using an effect image in the case of displaying a round plain white color. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a display image AKE1 using an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain blue display. FIG. 10-6(C) shows a display image AKE2 using an effect image in the case of performing a circular plain green display. FIG. 10-6(D) shows a display image AKE3 using an effect image in the case of displaying a round plain red color. The normal display mode in the hold display and the active display is a round plain white display using the display image AKE0. Among the display images AKE0 to AKE3, when the display color of the pending display or the active display is red using the display image AKE3, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the other display images AKE0 to AKE2 are used. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is green using the display image AKE2, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display color is red using the display image AKE3. When the display color of the pending display or the active display is blue using the display image AKE1, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display color is green using the display image AKE2. Among the display images AKE0 to AKE3, when the display color of the pending display and the active display is white using the display image AKE0, the display color becomes the normal display color, which is higher than when the other display images AKE1 to AKE3 are used. Low expectations of big wins. In this way, the pending display and the active display may have different degrees of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to a plurality of types of display modes.

FIG. 10-6(E) shows a display image AKE11 using an effect image capable of announcing the message "?". FIG. 10-6(F) shows a display image AKE12 using an effect image capable of informing a message of "chance". FIG. 10-6(G) shows a display image AKE13 using an effect image capable of announcing a message of "extreme heat". Among the display images AKE11 to AKE13, when the active display using the display image AKE13 announces the message of "very hot", the expectation for the big win is higher than when the other display images AKE11 and AKE12 are used. . When the message "chance" is reported by the active display using the display image AKE12, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display image AKE13 is used. When the message "?" is reported by the active display using the display image AKE11 among the display images AKE11 to AKE13, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the other display images AKE12 and AKE13 are used. In this way, the active display may have different expectations of being controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state, corresponding to a plurality of types of unique display modes.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of the production pattern is in the ready-to-win state, the display result of the special pattern becomes "big hit" at a predetermined ratio, and the pachinko game machine 1 performs a special production to suggest that the game state is controlled to the big win game state. It is possible to execute a ready-to-reach production that includes a production. The after-reach effects included in the ready-to-win effects include background display effects, step-up effects, and story effects, and it is sufficient if any of the effects can be selectively executed.

In the background display effect, for example, a effect image of a character that notifies a message is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a background image. The background display effect is different depending on whether it is executed after the variable display reaches the ready-to-win state or when it is not executed. , and it is sufficient if it is possible to suggest that it is controlled to the jackpot game state. The background display effect includes the content of the message by the character, the type of character, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of frame that will be the outer frame, size, shape, pattern, color, the type of effect display, size, shape, pattern, It is sufficient if it can be executed in different rendering modes depending on the display mode of arbitrary rendering images such as colors. Any display effect different from the background display effect may be executed in a different effect mode depending on the display mode of an arbitrary effect image or the like.

In the step-up effect, for example, in the display area of the effect image surrounded by a display frame that is a rectangular outer frame of a predetermined display color, the display contents of the effect image can be changed according to a predetermined order. An effect operation is performed in which the mode changes in a plurality of stages to become a step-up. The step-up effect is executed or not executed after the variable display reaches the ready-to-reach state, and the special symbols are displayed at different ratios according to the effect mode including the number of steps when executed. It is sufficient if the display result is "big win" and it is possible to suggest that the game state is controlled to a big win. The step-up effect includes display of effect images on the image display device 5, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or Any combination of all or part of them may be used as long as it can be executed in different rendering modes using an arbitrary rendering device.

In the story effect, for example, a effect image that can be continuously changed along with the passage of time along a series of stories is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a ready-to-reach effect image. The story production is executed or not executed after the variable display reaches the ready-to-win state, and the display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot" at different ratios according to the production mode when it is executed. It is sufficient if it is possible to suggest that it will be controlled to the next big hit game state. The story effect may be included in the full-screen effect that covers the entire screen by displaying the effect image over the entire display screen of the image display device 5 . The story presentation may be performed by playing back and displaying moving images, or may be performed by displaying animation of still images.

FIG. 10-7 shows a plurality of effect image display examples applicable to the background display effect. This effect image display example includes three display images AKF1 to AKF3 as a plurality of effect images applicable to the background display effect. The number of effect images applicable to the background display effect may be a plurality of images based on any design.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a display image AKF1 using an effect image in the case of including a character image announcing the message "???". FIG. 10-7(B) shows a display image AKF2 using an effect image in the case of including a character image announcing the message "Chance!!". FIG. 10-7(C) shows a display image AKF3 using an effect image in the case of including a character image announcing the message "Super heat!!". When the display image AKF3 out of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 is used to execute the background display effect, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the other display images AKF1 and AKF2 are used. When the background display effect is executed using the display image AKF2, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display image AKF3 is used. When the display image AKF1 of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 is used to perform the background display performance, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the other display images AKF2 and AKF3 are used.

FIG. 10-8 shows an effect image display example that can be changed when the step-up effect is executed. This effect image display example shows a case where four display images AKG1 to AKG4 are included as effect images that are changeably displayed in the step-up effect. The number of effect images to be changeably displayed in the step-up effect may be a plurality of images based on an arbitrary design. Further, after a single effect image is displayed in the step-up effect, the execution of the step-up effect may be terminated without changing the display.

FIG. 10-8(A) shows a display image AKG1 using the first step effect image corresponding to the step number "1" when the change in effect mode in the step-up effect is the first stage. FIG. 10-8(B) shows a display image AKG2 using the second step effect image corresponding to the step number "2" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up effect is the second stage. FIG. 10-8(C) shows a display image AKG3 using the third step effect image corresponding to the step number "3" when the change in the effect mode in the step-up effect is the third stage. FIG. 10-8(D) shows a display image AKG4 using the effect image of the fourth step corresponding to the number of steps "4" when the change in effect mode in the step-up effect is the fourth stage.

When the step-up effect is executed, the maximum number of steps may be determined to be any one of "1" to "4". The maximum number of steps indicates the number of steps in which the effect mode can be changed from the start of the step-up effect to the end. The display image AKG1 includes an outer-frame partial image with a blue display color and an inside-frame partial image of the first step, corresponding to the step number "1" of the first step in the step-up effect. The display image AKG2 can be displayed after the display image AKG1 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "2" in the second stage in the step-up effect, and is an outer frame partial image with a display color of green and the second step and a partial image within the frame of . The display image AKG3 can be displayed after the display image AKG2 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "3" in the third step in the step-up effect, and the outer frame image portion with the display color of red and the third step and a partial image within the frame of . The display image AKG4 can be displayed after the display image AKG3 is displayed, corresponding to the number of steps "4" in the fourth step in the step-up effect. and a partial image within the frame of .

FIG. 10-9 shows an example of an effect image display that can be changed when a story effect is executed. The contents of a series of story progresses in the story presentation may be different corresponding to a plurality of story presentation patterns. In this way, it is sufficient that the story production can be executed in different production modes corresponding to a plurality of story production patterns. In the effect image display example shown in FIG. 10-9, the effect image in which the display image AKH11 is displayed first is used regardless of the plurality of story effect patterns. After that, in correspondence with a plurality of story production patterns, a story is produced in a plurality of types of production modes including a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH21 is used and a case where a production image displaying the display image AKH22 is used. It is possible to perform a production. After the display image AKH21 is displayed, there are cases in which an effect image displaying the display image AKH31 is used, a case in which an effect image displaying the display image AKH32 is used, and a display image AKH33 corresponding to a plurality of story effect patterns. Story production can be executed in a plurality of types of production modes, including a case where a production image that displays is used. After the display image AKH22 is displayed, a plurality of cases including a case where an effect image displaying the display image AKH32 is used and a case where an effect image displaying the display image AKH33 is used corresponding to the plurality of story effect patterns Story production can be executed in various production modes. After the display image AKH31 is displayed, the effect image displaying the display image AKH41 is used, the effect image displaying the display image AKH42 is used, and the effect image displaying the display image AKH43 is used corresponding to the plurality of story effect patterns. The story effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes, including the case of using the effect image displaying the display image AKH44 and the case of using the effect image displaying the display image AKH44. After the display image AKH32 is displayed, the effect image displaying the display image AKH42 is used, the effect image displaying the display image AKH43 is used, and the display image AKH44 is used corresponding to the plurality of story effect patterns. Story production can be executed in a plurality of types of production modes, including a case where a production image that displays is used. After the display image AKH33 is displayed, a plurality of cases including a case where an effect image displaying the display image AKH43 is used and a case where an effect image displaying the display image AKH44 is used corresponding to the plurality of story effect patterns Story production can be executed in various production modes.

Of the display images AKH41 to AKH44, when the display image AHK44 is used to execute the story effect, the expectation for the big win is higher than when the other display images AKH41 to AHK43 are used. When the story effect is executed using the display image AKH43, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display image AKH44 is used. When the story effect is executed using the display image AKH42, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the display image AKH43 is used. When the display image AKH41 of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 is used to execute the story presentation, the expectation for the big win is lower than when the other display images AKH42 to AKH44 are used.

These post-reach productions need only be executable during a specific period included in the ready-to-reach production as a special production. The specific period is, for example, a period from the timing when the variable display is in the ready-to-win state when the display mode in the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode to the timing when the ready-to-win effect develops to become super ready-to-win. good too. Alternatively, the specific period may be a period from the timing when the ready-to-win game is established to the timing when the fixed effect symbol serving as the final stop symbol is stop-displayed and the variable display ends. In addition, the specific period may be any period set in response to the case where the variable display is in the reach state. From the start to the end of such a specific period, the performance pattern is transparent according to the transparent pattern and can be displayed. When the performance symbols are transparently displayed, the performance symbols may be displayed with different transmittances corresponding to a plurality of pattern transmission patterns. Further, when the performance symbols are displayed in a transparent manner, the transmittance of the performance symbols may be changed in different modes corresponding to a plurality of pattern transmission patterns.

The notice effect executable by the pachinko game machine 1 may include a timer effect and a timer standby effect. The timer effect can be executed in response to the start of the variable display, and it is sufficient if the remaining time from the start of the effect execution to the end thereof can be recognizably notified. The remaining time that can be notified by the timer effect may suggest the timing at which another effect is executed, or may suggest the timing at which the display result of the variable display is stop-displayed. Alternatively, the remaining time that can be notified by the timer effect may indicate the remaining time that the timer effect itself can be executed, regardless of other effects or variable displays. Other effects that can suggest the execution timing by the timer effect may include a jackpot expectation notification effect or a set value suggesting effect included in the ready-to-win effect, or include any advance notice effect different from the ready-to-win effect. good too. A timer standby performance recognizably suggesting that the execution of the timer performance is waiting can be executed before the timing of starting the execution of the timer performance. The timing at which execution of the timer effect is started can be included in the specific timing.

The timer effect is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed by using the game random number extracted when the starting prize is generated, for example. In the case where it is possible to determine whether or not, it is an effect that can be executed in the variable display that is the target of the determination. The timer standby effect is an effect that can be started before the variable display that is the object of determination when the timer effect is executed as an example of the look-ahead notice effect. The timer performance and the timer standby performance are executed in one of a plurality of types of performance modes based on the occurrence of the start winning, so that the display result becomes "big hit" at a predetermined ratio in the variable display of the special symbols, and the big win game is played. It may be possible to give advance notice of being controlled by the state. The performance mode of the timer standby performance includes, for example, a continuous performance mode in which the performance mode does not change from the start to the end of the performance execution, and a variable performance mode in which the performance mode changes from the start to the end of the performance execution. , contains The timer standby effect executed in the change effect mode can be included in the change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display.

FIG. 10-10 shows a plurality of effect image display examples applicable to the timer standby effect and the timer effect. This effect image display example includes five display images AKJ0 to AKJ2, AKJ11, and AKJ12 as a plurality of effect images applicable to the timer standby effect, and four display images AKJ21 to AKJ21 to AKJ21 to AKJ12 as a plurality of effect images applicable to the timer effect. Contains AKJ24. The number of effect images that can be applied to the timer standby effect and timer effect can be any number of images based on any design.

FIG. 10-10(A) shows a display image AKJ0 using an effect image in the case where the specific character includes a character image reporting a message "not yet..." as a specific display in the timer standby effect. In the timer standby effect, when the effect execution is started, the display image AKJ0 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display, so that the execution of the timer effect waits in response to the variable display based on the start winning. suggesting that The timer standby effect executed in the effect mode in which the specific display does not change is the timer standby effect in the continuous effect mode, and the timer standby effect executed in the effect mode in which the specific display changes is the timer standby effect in the variable effect mode. Become. In this embodiment, as the specific display, it is possible to display an effect image showing a specific character containing a character image for notifying a message, and both the timer effect and the timer standby effect include the specific display effect.

FIG. 10-10 (B1) uses a rendering image when a specific character includes a character image reporting a message of "plus 5 seconds", corresponding to the case where the timer standby rendering is executed in a variable rendering mode. 4 shows a display image AKJ1 that has been displayed. FIG. 10-10 (C1) uses a rendering image in the case where the specific character includes a character image reporting a message of "plus 15 seconds", corresponding to the case where the timer standby rendering is executed in the variable rendering mode. 4 shows a display image AKJ2 that has been displayed. When the timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is a first change display using the display image AKJ1 and a second change display using the display image AKJ2. It suffices if it can be changed to either one. In the timer standby effect of the changing effect mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0, the first changing display using the display image AKJ1, or the display image AKJ2 is used before the variable display for starting the execution of the timer effect. By changing to the second change display, it can be executed as a change effect of changing the display mode of the specific display. The change effect is not limited to changing the display image AKJ0 to either of the display images AKJ1 and AKJ2, and any effect can be changed before the variable display that is the object of determination. good.

FIG. 10-10 (B2) shows a display image AKJ11 using an effect image that can be displayed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode. is shown. FIG. 10-10 (C2) shows a display image AKJ12 using an effect image that can be displayed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0, corresponding to the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode. is shown. When the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is changed to the first change display using the display image AKJ1 or the second change display using the display image AKJ2. I have nothing to do. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode, the pre-stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ11 or the display image AKJ12 is performed at a predetermined ratio separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0. can be executed. The pre-stage effect is a specific display using the display image AKJ0 when the change effect is not executed by executing the timer standby effect of the continuous effect mode before the variable display for starting the execution of the timer effect. It is sufficient if it can be executed at a predetermined ratio without being changed. The pre-stage effect is not limited to using either of the display images AKJ11 and AKJ12, and the change of the specific display corresponding to the case where the change effect is not executed prior to the variable display that is the object of determination. It is sufficient if it can be executed in an arbitrary performance mode different from the above.

FIG. 10-10(D) shows a display image AKJ21 using an effect image in the case where the specific character includes a character image informing a message of "five seconds left" as a specific display in the timer effect. FIG. 10-10(E) shows a display image AKJ22 using an effect image in the case where the specific character includes a character image notifying the message "10 seconds left" as the specific display in the timer effect. FIG. 10-10(F) shows a display image AKJ23 using an effect image in the case where the specific character includes a character image notifying the message "15 seconds left" as the specific display in the timer effect. FIG. 10-10(G) shows a display image AKJ24 using an effect image including a character image in which a specific character notifies a message of "20 seconds left" as a specific display in the timer effect. It is sufficient that the remaining time until the execution of the effect is finished can be notified by executing the effect by the specific display displaying any of the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24 when the execution of the timer effect is started. After the specific display using the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24, a countdown display of the remaining time may be performed. The specific effect is not limited to the character movement effect, and may include pending display notice, active display, timer standby effect, timer effect, and any other effect that can be executed as a look-ahead notice effect. The specific display is not limited to the display of a specific character using the display image AKJ0, etc., but includes pending display, active display, and any display that can be displayed in a pre-reading notice effect or a notice effect other than a pre-reading notice effect. may be

FIG. 10-11 is a flow chart showing an example of prefetch effect setting processing. The look-ahead effect setting process is included in processes that can be called from the effect control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9A, and can be executed in step S151 each time the effect control process process S_CPROC is executed. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command, which is a starting opening winning command, is received when the prefetch effect setting process is executed (step AKS001). In step AKS001, for example, it is confirmed whether or not a start winning designation command, a hold storage information designation command, and a winning judgment result command are newly stored in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning. By doing so, it may be determined whether or not the effect control command is received at the time of starting winning.

When there is reception of the command at the time of start-up winning (step AKS001; Yes), the specified content by the received command is specified (step AKS002). For example, the determination result at the time of winning is specified as the specified content by the determination result command at the time of winning. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a determination limit (step AKS003). In step AKS003, it is determined that there is a determination limit when a predetermined restriction condition for determination at the time of winning is satisfied. The condition for limiting the winning determination is established, for example, when the specified content by the winning determination result command is during the winning determination restriction. In addition, the limiting condition for winning determination may be established, for example, when the number of pending memories is "0". In a configuration in which the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game, the second special game is easily executed during the time reduction control during the time reduction is based on the occurrence of the first start prize. When the start-up win-time command is received, the limiting conditions for the win-win determination may be established. In the range where such a limiting condition for determination at the time of winning is satisfied, in the case where it is possible to determine whether or not to be controlled to the big win game state based on the variable display before the start of the variable display, A restriction may be provided as a limit that the effect that is the pre-reading foretelling effect is not executed before the variable display that is the object of determination.

If there is no determination limit in response to step AKS003 (step AKS003; No), the character movement effect determination process (step AKS004) and the timer effect determination process (step AKS005) may be executed sequentially. The character movement effect determination process in step AKS004 is a process that enables determination regarding the start of execution of the character movement effect, such as whether or not to execute the character movement effect, effect pattern in the case of executing the character movement effect, and the like. be. The timer effect determination process of step AKS005 is a process that enables determination regarding the execution start of the timer effect, such as whether or not to execute the timer effect, effect pattern in the case of executing the timer effect, and the like.

If there is a determination limit corresponding to step AKS003 (step AKS003; Yes), after executing the timer effect determination processing of step AKS005, the pending display image is determined (step AKS006). The pending display image is an effect image used for pending display. After that, the update setting of the pending display at the time of starting winning is performed (step AKS007). By step AKS007, a new pending display is added so as to increase the pending display in the pending display area AKB0 by one. At step AKS007, the pending display image determined at step AKS006 may be displayed to start a new pending display. Alternatively, in step AKS007, regardless of the determination result in step AKS006, by first displaying the display image AKE0, the normal display mode may be displayed in a white round shape. After that, the display may be changed to the pending display image determined in step AKS006 at the shift timing when the pending display is shifted as the pending memory is consumed.

If there is no start-up winning command received in response to step AKS001 (step AKS001; No), after step AKS007, the suspension display shifts in response to the start of a new variable display due to the digestion of the suspension memory. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift (step AKS008). If it is not the shift timing (step AKS008; No), the look-ahead effect setting process ends.

If it is the shift timing corresponding to step AKS008 (step AKS008; Yes), the character movement effect executing process (step AKS009) and the timer effect executing process (step ASK010) can be executed sequentially. good. In the character moving effect executing process of step AKS009, when the character moving effect is being executed, presence/absence of effect of whether or not to execute the switching suggestion effect, presence/absence of effect of whether or not to execute the character hiding effect, and presence/absence of effect of whether or not to execute the character This processing enables determination and control during execution of the character movement effect, such as control during execution of the concealment effect. The processing during execution of the timer effect of step AKS010 is a process that enables settings relating to the execution of the timer effect and the timer standby effect, such as the setting for executing the timer effect and the setting for executing the timer standby effect.

After the processing during execution of the timer effect of step AKS010, the change start time pending display update setting is performed (step AKS011), and the prefetch effect setting process ends. By step AKS011, the pending display in the pending display area AKB0 is decremented by 1, the display portion corresponding to the pending number "1" is erased, and the pending display is cleared, and other pending numbers "2" to "4" are displayed. Move and shift the pending display in the corresponding display part one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. At this time, setting for updating the active display in the active display area AKA0 is performed corresponding to the erased pending display. Therefore, with the start of the variable display, the display of the effect image that becomes the active display in the active display area AKA0 can be started. The display of the effect image that becomes the active display may inherit the display mode of the effect image in the suspended display that has been erased. In this way, the effect mode of active display may inherit the effect mode of suspended display after the start of variable display. The data regarding such prefetch effect setting processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 . A usage example of the stored data regarding the look-ahead effect setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12.

The look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-11 makes it possible to refer to a pending display image determination table constructed using data stored in the ROM 121 when determining a pending display image in step AKS006, for example. In the pending display image determination table, determination values to be compared with the random number for determining the pending display image included in the random number for effect are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining a pending display image that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the pending display image determination table. It is possible to determine the effect image that becomes At this time, it is only necessary to be able to determine the effect image to be the pending display image at different ratios in accordance with the winning determination result. The data indicating the win determination result and the pending display image can be stored in the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 provided in a predetermined area such as the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-12(A) shows a determination example 002AKD01 of the pending display image. In the look-ahead effect setting process, at step AKS006, one of a plurality of types of pending display images can be determined. At this time, it is possible to determine the display image to be the pending display image at different ratios in accordance with the result of the winning determination. In addition, the display image that can be determined as the pending display image may be different depending on the winning determination result. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is any one of "determined reach when losing", "determined super reach when losing", or "jackpot", it is possible to determine the display image AKE2 whose display color is green at a predetermined ratio. , the display image AKE2 cannot be determined as a reserved display image when the winning determination result is "general when losing". When the judgment result at the time of winning is ``confirmation of super reach when losing'' or ``big hit'', the display image AKE3 with a display color of red can be determined at a predetermined ratio, while the judgment result at the time of winning is ``general when losing'' or In the case of "determination of reach when losing", the display image AKE3 cannot be determined as a pending display image. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate is higher than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", "definite reach when losing", or "general when losing" , the display image AKE3 is determined as the reserved display image. By such setting, when the holding display using the holding display image is performed, it can be suggested that the variable display result becomes ``big hit'' at a predetermined ratio according to the display color and is controlled to the big winning game state. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be displayed in a plurality of display modes with different expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state.

FIG. 10-12B shows a configuration example of the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 only needs to be able to store, as pending display data, various data for performing pending display in the pending display area AKB0 in response to the suspension of execution of the special game. . As the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01, there are a first pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the first special game, and a second pending display data storage unit corresponding to the pending storage display of the second special game. may be provided. In the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01, a storage area is reserved for storing data identifiably showing the determination result of winning and the pending display image in association with the pending number in the pending display area AKB0, for example. The pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 uses part or all of the command buffer, such as a storage area for the determination result command at the time of winning, in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning or the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, or the second It is sufficient that the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer are configured as separate storage units. The winning judgment result that can be stored in the reserved display data storage unit 002AKM01 indicates the judgment result of the prefetch judgment specified based on the winning judgment result command. The pending display image that can be stored by the pending display data storage unit 002AKM01 is displayed in the pending display area AKB0 based on the determination result of step AKS006, thereby recognizing the presence or absence of a special game that has not yet started and the number of pending. It is a production image that makes it possible.

FIG. 10-13 is a flow chart showing an example of character movement effect determination processing. The character movement effect determination process is included in processes that can be called from the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIGS. Effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character movement effect flag is ON when the character movement effect determination process is executed (step AKS021). The character movement effect flag is set to an ON state when execution of the character movement effect is started, and is cleared to an OFF state when execution of the character movement effect ends. Therefore, when the character movement effect flag is on, it is specified that the character movement effect is being executed.

When the character movement effect flag is ON in response to step AKS021 (step AKS021; Yes), the character movement effect determination process ends. As a result, a limit is set such that the character movement effect is not executed simultaneously or redundantly within the range in which the character movement effect is being executed. By restricting the execution of a plurality of character movement effects simultaneously or overlappingly, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated and to prevent the loss of interest in the game. On the other hand, if the character movement effect flag is off (step AKS021; No), the presence or absence of the character movement effect is determined (step AKS022). At this time, either "no character movement effect" in which the character movement effect is not executed or "character movement effect present" in which the character movement effect is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of this determination is "with character movement effect" (step ASK023).

In the case of "no character movement effect" instead of "with character movement effect" in response to step AKS023 (step AKS023; No), the character movement effect determination process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "with character movement effect" (step AKS023; Yes), the type of movement effect is determined (step ASK024). Also, a character movement effect pattern is determined (step AKS025). Then, the character movement effect start setting is performed (step AKS026), and the character movement effect determination process ends. Data related to such character movement effect determination processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 . A usage example of stored data relating to character movement effect determination processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 10-20.

The character movement effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-13 makes it possible to refer to the character movement effect execution determination table constructed using the data stored in the ROM 121, for example, when determining the presence or absence of the character movement effect in step AKS022. . In the character movement effect execution determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers for character movement effect execution determination included in the effect random numbers are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that will be updatable random numbers for determining execution of the character movement effect by means of a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character movement effect execution determination table so that the character It is possible to decide whether or not to execute a moving effect.

The character movement effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-13 makes it possible to refer to a character movement effect type determination table constructed using data stored in the ROM 121 when determining the movement effect type in step AKS024, for example. In the character movement effect type determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers for character movement effect type determination included in the random numbers for effect are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining the character movement effect type that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character movement effect type determination table. The production type can be determined as one of a plurality of types.

In the character movement effect processing shown in FIGS. 10-13, for example, when the character movement effect pattern is determined in step AKS025, the character movement effect pattern determination table configured using the data stored in the ROM 121 can be referred to. do. In the character movement effect pattern determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers for character movement effect pattern determination included in the effect random numbers are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that will be updatable random numbers for character movement effect pattern determination by means of a random counter or random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character movement effect pattern determination table. , the character movement pattern can be determined. The data indicating the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern can be stored in the character movement effect data storage section 002AKM02 provided in a predetermined area such as the effect control buffer setting section of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-14(A) shows a determination example 002AKD11 regarding the presence or absence of character movement effects. In the character movement effect determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not the character movement effect is effected in step AKS022. At this time, it suffices if it is possible to make different determinations as to whether or not the character movement effect is to be performed in accordance with the number of reserved memories. Also, if the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than a specific number, it is sufficient if it is possible to decide whether or not to perform character movement effects at different ratios in accordance with the result of determination at the time of winning. For example, when the number of pending memories is "1", the decision rate of "no" for not executing the character movement effect is 100%, and the decision rate for "yes" to execute the character movement effect is 0%. Therefore, if the number of pending memories is "1" when the starting prize is generated, it is determined that the character movement effect is not executed. In this manner, a limitation is provided as a limit that the character movement performance is not executed in a range where the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number, that is, the number of reserved memories is '1' when the starting prize is generated. To appropriately improve game interest by performance by preventing execution time of character movement performance from becoming too short by restricting execution of character movement performance when the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number. can be done.

In the determination example 002AKD11 in FIG. 10-14 (A), when the number of pending memories is any of "2" to "4", the judgment result at the time of winning is "general when losing", "reach fixed when losing", Corresponding to whether it is "super reach confirmation at the time of loss" or "big hit", the decision rate of "no" not to execute the character movement effect and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the character movement effect are different. different. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate is higher than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", "definite reach when losing", or "general when losing" , it is determined that the character movement effect is to be executed. Further, when the judgment result at the time of prize winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the character movement performance is higher than the decision rate of "no" to not execute the character movement performance. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach when losing", the decision rate is lower than when the judgment result at winning is "big hit", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "reach when losing", " It is decided to execute the character movement effect at a higher decision rate than when it is one of "general when losing". In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach when losing", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the character movement effect is the same as the decision rate of "no" not to execute the character movement effect. rate. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite reach when losing", a lower decision rate than when the judgment result at winning is either "big hit" or "super reach when losing", and the judgment at the time of winning At a higher decision rate than when the result is "general in case of failure", it is decided to execute the character movement effect "yes". When the judgment result at the time of winning is "general when losing", the decision rate is lower than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", "super reach when losing", or "reach when losing" , is determined to be "yes" to execute the character movement effect. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is either "fixed reach when losing" or "general when losing", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the character movement effect is "no" to not execute the character movement effect. is lower than the decision rate of . By such setting, when the character movement performance is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state which is an advantageous state for the player is higher than when the character movement performance is not executed. In addition, by arbitrary setting, when the character movement effect is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the character movement effect is not executed. may In this way, the character movement effect included in the specific effect is appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution of the character movement effect is enhanced, thereby improving the game interest.

FIG. 10-14(B) shows a determination example 002AKD12 of the moving effect type. In the character movement effect determination process, the movement effect type can be determined in step AKS024. In this embodiment, moving effect types RSA to RSD are prepared in advance as a plurality of moving effect types. The movement effect types RSA to RSD can constitute a group of effect patterns by classifying a plurality of effect patterns that can be used as pattern for character movement effect. The movement effect type RSA includes a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the second pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of determination. The movement effect type RSB includes a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the object of determination. The moving effect type RSC includes a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the case where the character moving effect is executed by switching to the second pattern after starting execution of the character moving effect in the first pattern. The moving effect type RSD includes a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the case where the character moving effect is executed by switching to the first pattern after starting execution of the character moving effect in the second pattern.

In the determination example 002AKD12 of FIG. 10-14(B), any one of the plurality of moving effect types RSA to RSD may be determined at different ratios depending on the winning determination result. Further, the types of movement effect that can be determined may differ depending on the result of determination at the time of winning. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is any one of ``fixed reach when losing'', ``fixed super reach when losing'', and ``jackpot'', it is possible to decide to one of the movement performance types RSC and RSD at a predetermined ratio. On the other hand, when the result of determination at the time of winning is "general at the time of loss", it is impossible to determine either of the moving effect types RSC and RSD. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate is higher than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", "definite reach when losing", or "general when losing" , the moving effect type RSD is determined. With this setting, when the character movement effect is executed, whether the execution of the character movement effect is started in the first pattern or the character movement effect is started in the second pattern, and then the second pattern is selected. It is an advantageous state for the player corresponding to whether the character movement performance is executed by switching from the 1st pattern to the 2nd pattern or whether the character movement performance is executed by switching from the 2nd pattern to the 1st pattern. The degree of expectation to be controlled in the jackpot game state is different. In addition, when the character movement effect is executed by any setting, whether the character movement effect is started in the first pattern or the character movement effect is started in the second pattern, and then, An advantageous state advantageous to the player is obtained in response to whether the character movement performance is executed by switching from the first pattern to the second pattern or whether the character movement performance is executed by switching from the second pattern to the first pattern. Expectations to be controlled to a certain jackpot game state may be different. In this way, when the character movement effect is executed, the character movement effect included in the specific effect is appropriately executed so that the player's attention to whether it is the first pattern or the second pattern is increased. , can improve the game interest.

FIG. 10-15 shows a configuration example of an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. In this embodiment, the movement effect type RSA includes effect patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2 as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as character movement effect patterns. -4, RPA1-3-3, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-2 to RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-3, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4 , RPA3-3-3, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, and RPA4-4-4. Each of the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA is a variable display that is executed one time before the target change that is the variable display that is the object of determination, and a variable display that is executed one time before. The 2nd-previous variation that is the variable display executed before, the 3rd-previous variation that is the variable display that is executed three times before, and the 4th-previous change that is the variable display that is executed four times before. Characters that can be displayed are specified corresponding to each. Note that the movement effect type RSA corresponds to a second pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of determination. Therefore, none of the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA designates a character that can be displayed in response to the target change, which is the variable display that is the object of determination.

FIG. 10-16 shows a configuration example of an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. In this embodiment, the movement effect type RSB includes effect patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4 and RPB1-1-2 as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement effect. -2 to RPB1-1-2-4, RPB1-1-3-3, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-2 to RPB1-2-2-4 , RPB1-2-3-3, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3-3-3, RPB1-3-3-4, RPB1-3-4-4, RPB1 -4-4-4, RPB2-2-2-2 to RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-3, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3 -3-3, RPB2-3-3-4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-3, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4 -4, RPB3-4-4-4, and RPB4-4-4-4. All of the plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSB are displayed corresponding to each of the target variation, the 1st previous variation, the 2nd previous variation, the 3rd previous variation, and the 4th previous variation. A possible character is specified. Note that the movement effect type RSB corresponds to the first pattern in which the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of determination. Therefore, characters that can be displayed corresponding to the target change are designated for all of the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB.

FIG. 10-17 shows a configuration example of an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSC. In this embodiment, the movement effect type RSC includes effect patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2 as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement effect. -4, RPC1-3-3, RPC1-3-4, RPC1-4-4, RPC2-2-2 to RPC2-2-4, RPC2-3-3, RPC2-3-4, RPC2-4-4 , RPC3-3-3, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, and RPC4-4-4. All of the plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSC correspond to the 1st-previous change, the 2nd-previous change, the 3rd-previous change, and the 4th-previous change with respect to the target change. characters that can be displayed by Note that the movement effect type RSC corresponds to the case where the character movement effect is executed by switching to the second pattern after starting the execution of the character movement effect in the first pattern. Therefore, none of the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSC specifies a character that can be displayed in response to the target change.

FIG. 10-18 shows a configuration example of an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSD. In this embodiment, the movement effect type RSD includes effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4 and RPD1-1-2 as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as patterns for character movement effect. -2 to RPD1-1-2-4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4 , RPD1-2-3-3, RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, RPD1 -4-4-4, RPD2-2-2-2 to RPD2-2-2-4, RPD2-3-3-3, RPD2-3-3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4 -4-4, RPD3-3-3-3, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4-4. All of the plurality of performance patterns included in the movement performance type RSD are displayed corresponding to each of the target variation, the first variation, the second variation, the third variation, and the fourth variation. A possible character is specified. Note that the movement effect type RSD corresponds to a case where the character movement effect is executed by switching to the first pattern after starting execution of the character movement effect in the second pattern. Therefore, characters that can be displayed corresponding to the target change are designated for all of the plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSD.

In the configuration examples shown in FIGS. 10-14 to 10-18, for any production pattern, characters that can be displayed corresponding to the 3rd-previous change and the 4th-previous change are designated by a common character. It has become a thing to be done. Therefore, for example, when the number of reserved memories is "4", execution of the character movement effect is started, and characters are displayed corresponding to the 4th-previous change and the 3rd-previous change, the common character changes. will be displayed without It should be noted that, for example, when the number of pending memories is "3", when the execution of the character movement effect is started, the character specified corresponding to the change four times before is not displayed, and the character specified corresponding to the change three times before is not displayed. Display starts from the specified character. When the execution of the character movement effect is started when the number of reserved memories is "2", the characters specified corresponding to the 4th and 3rd changes are not displayed, and the characters corresponding to the 2nd change are not displayed. Display starts from the character specified by Designation of characters that can be displayed corresponding to the 3rd-previous change and the 4th-previous change may be provided with an effect pattern in which different characters are specified.

A plurality of production patterns differ in designation of characters that can be displayed corresponding to each variation. For example, among the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA, the effect pattern RPA1-1-1 is continuously displayed without changing the character CH01 from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change. Execution of the performance ends. In addition, in the effect pattern RPA1-1-2, after the character CH01 is continuously displayed without change from the 4th-previous change to the 2nd-previous change, it is possible to change and display the character CH02 in the one-previous change. After that, execution of the character movement effect ends. In the effect pattern RPA1-2-3, after the character CH01 is continuously displayed without change in the four-time-previous change and the third-previous change, it is possible to change and display the character CH02 in the second-previous change. , the character CH03 can be changed and displayed in the one-time-previous change, and then the execution of the character movement effect is completed.

Among the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB, the effect pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is continuously displayed without changing the character CH11 from the fourth change to the target change, and the character movement effect is performed. Execution ends. In addition, in the effect pattern RPB1-1-1-2, after the character CH11 is continuously displayed without change from the 4th previous change to the 1st previous change, it is possible to change and display the character CH12 in the target change. After that, the execution of the character movement effect ends. In the effect pattern RPB1-2-3-4, after the character CH11 is continuously displayed without change in the 4th-previous change and the 3rd-previous change, it is possible to change and display the character CH12 in the 2nd-previous change. In the previous change, it can be changed and displayed as the character CH03, and in the target change, it can be changed and displayed as the character CH04, after which the execution of the character movement effect ends.

Among the plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSC, the effect pattern RPC1-1-1-1 is continuously displayed without changing the character CH11 from the 4th previous change to the start of the 2nd previous change. Later, the character CH11 is switched from the character CH01 to be displayed in the second-previous change, and the character CH01 can be continuously displayed without being changed in the one-previous change, after which the execution of the character movement effect is completed. . In the effect pattern RPC1-1-1-2, after the character CH11 is continuously displayed without change from the 4th time before the change to the start of the 2nd time before the change, the character CH11 changes to the character CH01 in the 2nd time before the change. , and in the previous change, it can be changed to the character CH02 and displayed, after which the execution of the character movement effect ends.

Among the plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSD, the effect pattern RPD1-1-1-1 is continuously displayed without changing the character CH01 from the 4th time before change to the start of the 2nd time before change. Later, the character CH01 is switched to the character CH11 and displayed in the two-previous change, and the character CH11 can be continuously displayed without change in the one-previous change and the target change, and then the character movement effect is executed. ends. In the effect pattern RPD1-1-1-2, the character CH01 is continuously displayed without change from the 4th-previous change to the start of the 2nd-previous change. In the previous change, the character CH11 can be displayed continuously without change, and in the target change, the character CH11 can be changed and displayed, and then the execution of the character movement effect ends. do. In this way, the character movement effect pattern used for executing the character movement effect is a effect pattern in which different characters can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers included in the symbols attached to each character movement effect pattern. be.

In a plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSA, all of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed after the variable display in which the character CH01 can be displayed. After the variable display capable of displaying the character CH02, any one of the characters CH02 to CH04 can be displayed, but the character CH01 cannot be displayed. After the variable display in which the character CH03 can be displayed, either the characters CH03 or CH04 can be displayed, but neither the characters CH01 nor CH02 can be displayed. After the variable display capable of displaying the character CH04, the character CH04 becomes displayable, but none of the characters CH01 to CH03 becomes displayable.

In a plurality of effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSB, all of the characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed after the variable display in which the character CH11 can be displayed. After the variable display capable of displaying the character CH12, any one of the characters CH12 to CH14 can be displayed, but the character CH11 cannot be displayed. After the variable display capable of displaying character CH13, either character CH13 or CH14 becomes displayable, but neither character CH11 or CH12 becomes displayable. After the variable display capable of displaying the character CH14, the character CH14 becomes displayable, but none of the characters CH11 to CH13 becomes displayable.

A plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSC are such that a character that can be displayed in correspondence with the first pattern is switched to a character that can be displayed in correspondence with the second pattern in the two-time-previous change, and the character movement effect is performed. to be executable. Before the character is switched in the second-previous change, the character that can be displayed in the current variable display corresponds to the character that was displayed in the previous variable display, similarly to the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB. and a character that cannot be displayed in this variable display. After the character is switched in the second previous variation, it becomes possible to display in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display, similarly to the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA. A character and a character that cannot be displayed in this variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the character that can be displayed in correspondence with the first pattern to the character that can be displayed in correspondence with the second pattern is not limited to the variable display that changes two times before, and character movement effects are executed. In any of the possible variable displays, the character that can be displayed corresponding to the first pattern can be switched to the character that can be displayed corresponding to the second pattern.

A plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSD are such that the characters that can be displayed corresponding to the second pattern are switched to the characters that can be displayed corresponding to the first pattern in the second-previous change, and character movement effects are performed. to be executable. Before the characters are switched in the second-previous change, the characters that can be displayed in the current variable display correspond to the characters that were displayed in the previous variable display, similarly to the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA. and a character that cannot be displayed in this variable display. After the character is switched in the second previous variation, it becomes possible to display in the current variable display corresponding to the characters displayed in the previous variable display in the same manner as the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB. A character and a character that cannot be displayed in this variable display are provided. Note that the variable display that switches the character that can be displayed in correspondence with the second pattern to the character that can be displayed in correspondence with the first pattern is not limited to the variable display that changes two times before, and the character movement effect is executed. In any of the possible variable displays, the character that can be displayed corresponding to the second pattern may be switched to the character that can be displayed corresponding to the first pattern.

FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 include an example of determination of the effect pattern that becomes the character movement effect pattern. In this determination example, a different effect pattern can be determined in accordance with the determination result of the moving effect type. FIG. 10-19(A) shows a determination example 002AKD13 for the moving effect type RSA, FIG. 10-19(B) shows a determination example 002AKD14 for the moving effect type RSB, and FIG. ) shows a decision example 002AKD15 for the moving effect type RSC, and FIG. 10-20B shows a decision example 002AKD16 for the moving effect type RSD. At step AKS025 of the character movement effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect type determined at step AKS024 is determined as the character movement effect pattern. It becomes possible. In this case, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "General when losing", "Determined reach when losing", or "Determined super reach when losing", and at the time of winning when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit" , and the effect pattern can be determined at a determination rate corresponding to .

In the determination example 002 AKD13 in the case of the moving effect type RSA, the determination rate of the effect pattern RPA1-1-1 is the highest in response to the failure, and the effect patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1- 3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2-3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, RPA4-4-4, character CH04 The decision rate of displayable production patterns is the lowest. In the decision example 002AKD13 in the case of the moving effect type RSA, the decision rate of the effect pattern RPA1-1-1 is the highest even at the time of the big hit. However, the decision rate is lower at the time of a big hit than at the time of a loss. In the determination example 002AKD13 in the case of the moving effect type RSA, even at the time of the big hit, the effect patterns RPA1-1-4, RPA1-2-4, RPA1-3-4, RPA1-4-4, RPA2-2-4, RPA2 -3-4, RPA2-4-4, RPA3-3-4, RPA3-4-4, RPA4-4-4, etc., the decision rate of the effect pattern capable of displaying the character CH04 is the lowest. However, their decision rate is higher at the time of a big hit than at the time of a loss. Therefore, among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSA, the case where the character CH04 is displayed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the character CH04 is not displayed. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, which is the state, increases.

In the determination example 002AKD14 in the case of the moving effect type RSB, the determination rate of the effect pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is the highest in response to the failure, and the effect patterns RPB1-1-1-4 and RPB1-1- 2-4, RPB1-1-3-4, RPB1-1-4-4, RPB1-2-2-4, RPB1-2-3-4, RPB1-2-4-4, RPB1-3-3- 4, RPB1-3-4-4, RPB1-4-4-4, and the like, which can display the character CH14, are included in the effect patterns with the lowest decision rate. In the determination example 002AKD14 in the case of the moving effect type RSB, the effect patterns RPB2-2-2-4, RPB2-2-3-4, RPB2-2-4-4, RPB2-3-3 correspond to the big hit. -4, RPB2-3-4-4, RPB2-4-4-4, RPB3-3-3-4, RPB3-3-4-4, RPB3-4-4-4, RPB4-4-4-4 , etc., the determination rate of the production pattern in which the character CH11 is not displayed and the character CH14 can be displayed is the highest. In the decision example 002AKD14 in the case of the moving effect type RSB, the decision rate of the effect pattern RPB1-1-1-1 is the lowest corresponding to the big win. Therefore, among the cases in which the character movement effect is executed in the effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB, the case where the character CH11 is not displayed and the character CH14 is displayed is the case where the character CH14 is not displayed and the character CH11 is displayed. The degree of expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player, is higher than when it is displayed.

In the determination example 002 AKD15 in the case of the moving effect type RSC, the determination rate of the effect pattern becomes 5%, which is the common determination rate, corresponding to the failure. In the determination example 002AKD15 in the case of the moving effect type RSC, in response to the big hit, the first pattern such as the effect pattern RPC2-4-4, RPC3-3-4, RPC3-4-4, RPC4-4-4, etc. Character CH11 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and character CH04 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. . In the determination example 002AKD15 in the case of the moving effect type RSC, the effect patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4, RPC1-2-2 to RPC1-2-4, and RPC1-3-3 correspond to the big hit. , RPC1-3-4, RPC1-4-4, etc., which can display the character CH11 when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, has the lowest determination rate. Therefore, in the case where the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSC, the character CH11 is not displayed in the case where the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, and the character CH11 is not displayed in the second pattern. The case where the character CH04 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed is more advantageous for the player than the case where the character CH11 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, which is the state, increases.

In the determination example 002AKD16 in the case of the moving effect type RSD, the determination rate of the effect pattern RPD2-2-2-2 is the highest in response to the failure, and the effect patterns RPD2-2-2-4 and RPD2-3- 3-4, RPD2-3-4-4, RPD2-4-4-4, RPD3-3-3-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4- 4, the character CH01 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and the character CH14 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern. is lowest. In the determination example 002AKD16 in the case of the moving effect type RSD, the effect patterns RPD3-4-4-4, RPD3-3-4-4, RPD3-4-4-4, RPD4-4-4 correspond to the big hit. -4, the character CH01 and the character CH02 are not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and the character CH14 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern. has the highest decision rate. In the determination example 002AKD16 in the case of the moving effect type RSD, the effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4, RPD1-1-2-2 to RPD1-2-2 correspond to the big hit. -4, RPD1-1-3-3, RPD1-1-3-4, RPD1-1-4-4, RPD1-2-2-2 to RPD1-2-2-4, RPD1-2-3-3 , RPD1-2-3-4, RPD1-2-4-4, RPD1-3-3-3, RPD1-3-3-4, RPD1-3-4-4, RPD1-4-4-4, etc. The effect pattern capable of displaying the character CH01 when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern has the lowest determination rate. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD, the character CH01 is not displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, and the character CH01 is not displayed in the first pattern. The case where the character CH14 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed is more advantageous to the player than the case where the character CH01 is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, which is the state, increases.

The first pattern is an execution pattern of the character movement effect in which the effect mode of the character movement effect before the variable display, which is the target of the determination of whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, is inherited after the variable display. be. The second pattern is an execution pattern of the character movement effect that does not inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect before the variable display, which is the target of the determination of whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, after the variable display. be. Among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the case where the character CH04 is displayed is higher than the case where the character CH01 is displayed so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher. , the determination rate of the production pattern should be set. Among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, the degree of expectation for the big hit is highest when the character CH04 is displayed, and when the character CH03 is displayed and the character CH02 is displayed, the character CH01 is displayed. The determination rate of the effect pattern may be set so that the degree of expectation for the big win becomes lower as the number of times of display increases. Among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the case where the character CH14 is displayed is higher than the case where the character CH11 is displayed so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher. , the determination rate of the production pattern should be set. Among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the degree of expectation for a big hit is highest when the character CH14 is displayed, and when the character CH13 is displayed and the character CH12 is displayed, the character CH11 is displayed. The determination rate of the effect pattern may be set so that the degree of expectation for the big win becomes lower as the number of times of display increases.

In the character movement effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-13, the effect control CPU 120 sets the character movement effect start setting in step AKS026 after determining the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern in step ASK025. , control so that execution of the character movement effect can be started. For example, an effect control pattern for character movement effect, which is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, is read out corresponding to the effect pattern determined in step AKS025. In response to the control data included in the effect control pattern, by sending an effect execution instruction to the display control unit 123, an effect image showing the character is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the character movement effect is performed. Let it start running. A character movement effect flag is set to an ON state when the execution of the character movement effect is started. Also, the initial count value of the character display counter is set in accordance with the number of pending memories. The data indicating the character movement effect flag and the count value of the character display counter so as to be identifiable are stored in a character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 provided in a predetermined area together with the data indicating the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern so as to be identifiable. can be stored in

FIG. 10-20(C) shows a configuration example of the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02. The character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 stores a character movement effect flag, effect pattern, character display counter, and concealment effect flag. The production pattern determined as the pattern is shown. The count value of the character display counter is set as an initial value, for example, the number of pending memories when starting execution of the character movement effect, and by subtracting 1 each time the variable display is executed, the count value becomes the object of determination. It is sufficient if the remaining number of times until the variable display is executed can be counted. Of the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data indicating the effect pattern and the data indicating the count value of the character display counter to display the character to be displayed in the character movement effect. can be specified. The data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 includes data that can specify the concealment effect flag. The concealment effect flag is set to an ON state when execution of the character concealment effect is started, and cleared to an OFF state when the execution of the character concealment effect is completed. Therefore, when the concealment effect flag is on, it is specified that the character concealment effect is being executed.

FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an example of timer effect determination processing. The timer effect determination process is included in the processes that can be called from the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, and can be executed in step AKS005 after the character movement effect determination process of step AKS004 is executed. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer effect flag is ON when the timer effect determination process is executed (step AKS031). A timer performance flag is set to an ON state when execution of a timer standby performance is started based on the determination result of executing the timer performance, and the execution of the timer performance executed following the timer standby performance is completed. cleared to the off state. Therefore, when the timer effect flag is ON, it is specified that the timer standby effect or the timer effect is being executed.

When the timer effect in-progress flag is ON in response to step ASK031 (step AKS031; Yes), the timer effect determination process ends. As a result, a limitation is provided as a limit that the timer standby effect or timer effect is not executed simultaneously or redundantly within the range where the timer standby effect or timer effect is being executed. By restricting a plurality of timer standby performances and timer performances so as not to be executed simultaneously or redundantly, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game. On the other hand, if the timer effect flag is off (step AKS31; No), the presence or absence of the timer effect is determined (step AKS032). At this time, either "no timer effect" for not executing the timer effect or "with timer effect" for executing the timer effect is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result is "with timer effect" (step AKS033).

In response to step AKS033, in the case of "no timer effect" instead of "with timer effect" (step AKS033; No), the timer effect determination process ends. On the other hand, in the case of "with timer effect" (step AKS033; Yes), a pattern for timer effect is determined (step AKS034). Also, a pattern for standby effect is determined (step AKS035). Then, the timer standby effect start setting is performed (step AKS036), and the timer effect determination process ends. Data related to such timer effect determination processing may be stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 . An example of using data relating to the timer effect determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 makes it possible to refer to the timer effect execution determination table constructed using the data stored in the ROM 121 when determining whether or not to use the timer effect in step AKS032, for example. In the timer effect execution determination table, a determination value to be compared with a random number for timer effect execution determination included in the effect random number is set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining the execution of the timer effect that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the timer effect execution determination table to control the timer effect. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the effect.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 makes it possible to refer to the timer effect pattern determination table constructed using the data stored in the ROM 121 when determining the timer effect pattern in step AKS034, for example. In the timer effect pattern determination table, determination values to be compared with the random numbers for timer effect pattern determination included in the effect random numbers are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining a pattern for timer effect that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in a RAM 122, and refers to a pattern determination table for timer effect. It is possible to determine a performance pattern to be a performance pattern. The data indicating the effect pattern to be the timer effect pattern can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a predetermined area such as the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

The timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21 makes it possible to refer to the standby effect pattern determination table constructed using the data stored in the ROM 121 when determining the standby effect pattern in step AKS035, for example. In the waiting effect pattern determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random number for determining the pattern during standby effect included in the random number for effect is set in advance. The production control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that becomes a random number for determining a pattern during standby production that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the pattern determination table for waiting production, so that the standby It is possible to determine a performance pattern to be a performance pattern. Data indicating the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 provided in a predetermined area such as the effect control buffer setting unit of the RAM 122, for example.

FIG. 10-22 shows a determination example 002AKD21 regarding the presence or absence of the timer effect. In the timer effect determination process, it is possible to determine whether or not the timer effect is effected in step AKS032. At this time, it suffices if it is possible to make different determinations as to the presence or absence of the timer effect according to the number of pending memories. In addition, when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a specific number, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not the timer effect is to be performed at different ratios in accordance with the result of determination at the time of winning. Furthermore, even with the common prize winning determination result, it may be possible to determine whether or not the timer effect is to be performed at different ratios corresponding to the number of pending memories that is equal to or greater than a specific number. For example, when the number of reserved memories is "1", the decision rate of "no" for not executing the timer effect is 100%, and the decision rate for "yes" to execute the timer effect is 0%. Therefore, if the number of reserved memories is "1" when the starting prize is generated, it is determined that the timer effect is not executed. In this manner, a limitation is provided as a limit that the timer performance is not executed in a range in which the number of reserved memories is less than a specific number, that is, the number of reserved memories is '1' when the starting prize is generated. By restricting the execution of the timer performance when the reserved storage number is less than a specific number, the execution time of the timer standby performance can be ensured and the game interest by the performance can be appropriately improved.

In the determination example 002AKD21 in FIG. 10-22, when the number of pending memories is any of "2" to "4", the judgment result at the time of winning is "general when losing", "determined reach when losing", "when losing" A determination rate of 'no' for not executing the timer performance and a determination rate for 'yes' to perform the timer performance are different corresponding to whether it is "super ready-to-win fixed" or "big win". In addition, even if it is a common prize winning determination result, the decision rate of "none" that does not execute the timer effect and the timer effect are determined according to which of the number of pending memories is "2" to "4". The decision rate of "yes" to execute may be different from the decision rate. For example, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the decision rate is higher than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite super reach when losing", "definite reach when losing", or "general when losing" , it is determined to be "yes" to execute the timer effect. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of prize winning is "big hit", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the timer performance is higher than the decision rate of "no" to not perform the timer performance. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "super reach when losing", the decision rate is lower than when the judgment result at winning is "big hit", and the judgment result at the time of winning is "reach when losing", " At a higher decision rate than when it is either "general when losing", it is decided to "yes" to execute the timer effect. When the judgment result at the time of winning is "definite reach when losing", a lower decision rate than when the judgment result at winning is either "big hit" or "super reach when losing", and the judgment at the time of winning At a decision rate higher than when the result is "general when losing", it is decided to execute the timer effect "yes". When the judgment result at the time of winning is "general when losing", the decision rate is lower than when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", "super reach when losing", or "reach when losing" , is determined to be "yes" to execute the timer effect. In addition, when the judgment result at the time of winning is either "Definite reach when losing" or "General when losing", the decision rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is "No" decision not to execute the timer effect The decision rate is lower than the rate. By such setting, when the timer performance is executed, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state which is an advantageous state for the player is higher than when the timer performance is not executed. In this way, the timer effect in which the specific display is performed is appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution of the timer effect can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

In the decision example 002AKD21 in FIG. 10-22, when the winning determination result is "general when losing", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher than when the number of pending memories is "4". It is higher when the number of reserved memories is "3", and is higher when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when the number of reserved memories is "3". Even when the judgment result at the time of winning is "determined reach when losing", the decision rate of "yes" to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of pending memories is "3" than when the number of pending memories is "4". , and is higher when the number of reserved memories is "2" than when the number of reserved memories is "3". When the judgment result at the time of winning is ``confirmation of super reach when losing'', the decision rate of ``Yes'' to execute the timer effect is higher when the number of reserved memories is ``3'' than when the number of reserved memories is ``4''. , and the determination rate is 50%, which is common when the number of pending memories is "3" and "2". On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big hit", the determination rate of "Yes" to execute the timer effect is highest when the number of pending memories is "4", and the number of pending memories is "3". , the number of reserved memories is lower than when the number of reserved memories is "4", and when the number of reserved memories is "2", it is lower than when the number of reserved memories is "3". With such a setting, when the number of reserved memories is large when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed, it is expected to be controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, rather than when the number of reserved memories is small. degree increases. In addition, by arbitrary setting, when the number of reserved memories is large when it is determined to execute the timer performance, it is controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state for the player as compared to when the number of reserved memories is small. Expectations may be raised. Execution of the timer effect is started in response to the start of the variable display that is the object of the determination. The timer standby effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display before the timing of starting execution of the timer effect. A longer execution time of the timer standby performance corresponding to a large number of reserved memories is more advantageous for the player than a shorter execution time of the timer standby performance corresponding to a smaller number of reserved memories. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state which is an advantageous state is increased. In this way, the timer standby effect and the timer effect can be appropriately executed so that the player's attention to the execution time of the timer standby effect can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game.

FIG. 10-23(A) shows a determination example 002AKD22 of an effect pattern to be a timer effect pattern. In this embodiment, four effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as timer effect patterns. The number of production patterns that can be determined as timer production patterns may be a plurality of patterns based on an arbitrary design. Execution time of the timer effect is set differently corresponding to the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4. For example, the effect pattern TPA1 has a timer effect execution time of 5 seconds, the effect pattern TPA2 has a timer effect execution time of 10 seconds, the effect pattern TPA3 has a timer effect execution time of 15 seconds, and the effect pattern TPA4. , the execution time of the timer effect is 20 seconds. Corresponding to the fact that the execution time of the timer effect is different, it is also possible to vary the period during which the specific display in the timer effect can be displayed. For example, the specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2 than when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1. The specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3 than when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2. The specific display can be displayed for a longer period when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4 than when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3.

At step AKS034 of the timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, one of a plurality of effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4 prepared in advance can be determined as a timer effect pattern. At this time, it suffices if it is possible to determine different performance patterns corresponding to the determination result at the time of winning, ``general when losing'', ``definite reach when losing'', ``definite super reach when losing'', and ``big hit''. In addition, it may be possible to determine the effect pattern at different ratios in accordance with the result of determination at the time of winning. For example, when the winning determination result is "general when losing", the decision rate of the effect pattern TPA1 as the timer effect pattern is 100%, and the decision rate of the effect patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is 0%. Therefore, if the result of determination at the time of winning is "general at the time of losing", the effect pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer effect pattern, and the effect patterns TPA2 to TPA4 are not determined. In this way, the timer performance is not executed in the specific performance pattern in the range of the determination result most unfavorable to the player in the case where the judgment result at the time of winning is ``general at the time of loss'', i.e., not controlled to the jackpot game state. A limit is set as a limit. Further, if the result of determination at the time of winning is "determined ready-to-win at the time of losing", the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3 can be determined as patterns for the timer effect, and the effect pattern TPA4 cannot be determined. In this manner, a limitation is provided as a limit that the timer effect is not executed in the special effect pattern within the range where the winning determination result is "determined reach when losing". When the judgment result is disadvantageous to the player, by restricting the execution of the timer performance in the specific performance pattern or the special performance pattern, the player's expectation heightened by the timer performance is hardly reduced. Thus, by appropriately executing the timer effect, the game interest can be improved.

In the determination example 002 AKD22 in FIG. The effect pattern TPA4 is determined as the pattern for timer effect at a higher determination rate than when it is one of "general". Further, when the winning determination result is "big win", the determination rate of the performance pattern TPA4 is higher than the determination rate of the other performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. When the judgment result at the time of winning is ``confirmation of super reach at the time of losing'', the performance is performed at a decision rate lower than that when the judgment result at the time of winning is ``jackpot'' and furthermore, at a decision rate lower than the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The pattern TPA4 is determined. With such setting, when the timer performance is executed in the performance pattern TPA4, the big hit is an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than when the timer performance is executed in any one of the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The degree of expectation to be controlled in the game state increases. In addition, when the timer performance is executed in the performance pattern TPA4 by arbitrary setting, it is in an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than when the timer performance is executed in any one of the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state may be increased. The effect pattern TPA4 is the effect pattern in which the execution time of the timer effect is the longest among the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4, and is the effect pattern in which the specific display can be displayed in the longest period. At the time of a big win when the judgment result at the time of winning is "big win", the decision rate of the performance patterns TPA1 to TPA3 becomes 20%, which is the common decision rate. On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of winning is one of "general when losing", "definite reach when losing", or "definite super reach when losing", the decision rate of the production pattern TPA1 is the highest decision rate. , the determination rate of the performance pattern TPA2 becomes the next highest determination rate, and the determination rate of the performance pattern TPA3 becomes the lowest determination rate. The performance pattern TPA3 is a performance pattern in which the timer performance execution time is shorter than the performance pattern TPA4, the performance pattern TPA2 is a performance pattern in which the timer performance execution time is shorter than the performance pattern TPA1, and the performance pattern TPA1 is the timer performance. is the effect pattern in which the execution time of is the shortest. Therefore, in the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, the case where the specific display is displayed for a long period is more advantageous to the player than the case where the specific display is displayed for a short period. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state is increased. In this way, the timer effect in which the specific display is performed so as to increase the player's attention to the fact that the timer effect is executed in the special effect pattern and that the specific display is displayed for a long period of time. can be executed appropriately to improve the game interest.

FIG. 10-23(B) shows a determination example 002AKD23 of an effect pattern to be a standby effect pattern. In this embodiment, five effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as the standby effect patterns. The number of production patterns that can be determined as the standby production pattern may be any number of patterns based on any design. The effect modes of the timer standby effect are set differently corresponding to the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1 and TPB2-2. For example, in the effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change. In the effect pattern TPB1-1, the timer standby effect is executed in a changing display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is changed to the first changing display using the display image AKJ1. In the effect pattern TPB1-1, the timer standby effect is executed in a changing display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is changed to the second changing display using the display image AKJ2. In the effect pattern TPB2-1, the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode, and the pre-stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ11 is executed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0. In the effect pattern TPB2-2, the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode, and the pre-stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ12 is executed separately from the specific display using the display image AKJ0.

In step AKS035 of the timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, a standby effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, TPB1-2, TPB2-1, TPB2-2 prepared in advance. It is possible to determine any effect pattern that becomes At this time, it is sufficient if a different effect pattern can be determined in accordance with the determination result of the effect pattern to be the timer effect pattern in step AKS034. Also, it may be possible to determine the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern at a different ratio in accordance with the determination result of the effect pattern to be the timer effect pattern. For example, when the effect pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer effect pattern, any one of the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1 and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby effect pattern, and the effect patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2- 2 is not determined. When the effect pattern TPA2 is determined as the timer effect pattern, any one of the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1 and TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby effect pattern, and the effect patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-2 can be determined. Not determined. When the effect pattern TPA3 is determined as the pattern for the timer effect, any one of the effect patterns TPB1-2 and TPB2-1 can be determined as the pattern for the standby effect, and the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1 and TPB2-2 are Not determined. When the effect pattern TPA4 is determined as the pattern for the timer effect, any one of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 can be determined as the pattern for the standby effect, and the effect patterns TPB0, TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 are Not determined.

The performance pattern TPB0 is determined to be the standby performance pattern at the highest determination rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA1, and moreover, the timer performance pattern is one of the performance patterns TPA2 to TPA4. is also determined to be the standby effect pattern at a high determination rate. When the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA2, the effect pattern TPB1-1 is determined as the standby effect pattern at a higher determination rate than when the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA1. When the pattern for use is one of the production patterns TPA3 and TPA4, the pattern for standby production is not determined. The effect pattern TPB1-2 is determined to be the standby effect pattern at the highest determination rate when the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA3, while the timer effect pattern is any one of the effect patterns TPA1, TPA2 and TPA4. In the case of , it is not determined as the standby effect pattern. The performance pattern TPB2-1 is determined to be the standby performance pattern at the highest determination rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA2, and the timer performance pattern is any one of the performance patterns TPA1, TPA3 and TPA4. , the standby effect pattern is determined at a higher determination rate than in the case of . The effect pattern TPB2-2 is determined to be the standby effect pattern at the highest determination rate when the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA4, while the timer effect pattern is one of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. In the case, it is not determined to the pattern for standby effect. With such a setting, when the timer standby effect is executed in either of the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2, the timer effect is executed more than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. It can take a long time. Therefore, the specific display in the timer effect is better when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed in the change effect mode than when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is not executed in the continuous effect mode. It can be displayed over a long period of time. Further, when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode and the previous stage effect is executed without the change effect being executed, the timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode and the change effect is executed. , it may be possible to display a specific effect in the timer effect for a long period of time. In this way, even when the timer standby performance is not executed in the change performance mode and the specific display does not change, the expectation for the timer performance is heightened by executing the pre-stage performance, so that there is unexpectedness when the specific display does not change. By appropriately executing the change performance and the pre-stage performance so as to enhance the performance, the amusement of the game can be improved.

10-21 in the timer effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU120, after determining the effect pattern to be the timer effect pattern in step AKS035, by performing the timer standby effect start setting of step AKS036, the timer Set to be able to start the execution of the standby production. For example, corresponding to the effect pattern determined by step AKS035, the effect control pattern for the timer standby effect, which is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, is read. A display image AKJ1 or the like is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display including a specific character by sending an instruction to execute the production to the display control unit 123 in accordance with the control data included in the production control pattern. , the execution of the timer waiting effect may be started. A timer performance flag is set to an ON state when starting the execution of the timer standby performance. Also, the initial count value of the remaining number counter is set according to the number of reserved memories. The data indicating that the timer effect flag and the count value of the remaining counter are identifiable are stored in a timer effect data storage unit provided in a predetermined area together with the data indicating that the effect pattern that is the timer effect pattern and the standby effect pattern can be specified. 002AKM03.

FIG. 10-23(C) shows a configuration example of the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03. The timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 is provided with a storage area for storing data identifiably indicating a timer effect flag, a timer effect pattern, a standby effect pattern, and a remaining number counter. The timer effect pattern that can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates the effect pattern determined as the timer effect pattern. The standby effect pattern that can be stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 indicates the effect pattern determined as the standby effect pattern. The count value of the remaining number counter is set as an initial value, for example, the number of pending memories when starting execution of the timer standby effect, and by subtracting 1 each time the variable display is executed, the variable that is the object of determination It is sufficient if the remaining number of times until the display is executed can be counted.

FIG. 10-24 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during execution of character movement effect. The character movement effect executing process is included in the process that can be called from the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIG. . Effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character movement effect flag is ON when the character movement effect executing process is executed (step ASK041). When the character movement effect flag is off (step ASK041; No), the character movement effect in-execution processing is terminated in response to the fact that the character movement effect is not being executed.

When the character movement effect flag is on corresponding to step AKS041 (step AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the concealment effect flag is on (step ASK042). If the concealment effect flag is off (step AKS042; No), the presence or absence of the character concealment effect is determined (step AKS043). At this time, either "no character hiding effect" in which the character hiding effect is not executed or "character hiding effect present" in which the character hiding effect is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of this determination is "with character hiding effect" (step ASK044). In the case of "with character hiding effect" (step AKS044; Yes), character hiding effect start setting is performed (step AKS045), and the character moving effect executing process is terminated. The character concealment effect start setting includes a setting for starting the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect overlapping the display position of the character in the character movement effect. As a result, execution of the character hiding effect can be started as the special effect of making the character moving effect, which is the specific effect, invisible.

When the concealment effect flag is ON in response to step AKS042 (step AKS042; Yes), the character concealment control is determined (step ASK046). At this time, "Continue Concealment" for continuing the character hiding effect, "Resume Display" for ending the character hiding effect and restarting the display in the character moving effect, and at the same time ending the character hiding effect, the display in the character moving effect is also performed. Either “end of display” to end is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of this decision is "continue concealment" (step AKS047). If it is "Continue Concealment" (step AKS047; Yes), the processing during execution of character movement effect is terminated.

If it is not "continue concealment" in response to step AKS047 (step AKS047; No), it is determined whether or not the determination result in step AKS046 is "resume display" (step AKS048). If it is "restart display" (step AKS048; Yes), character movement effect restart setting is performed (step AKS049). The character movement effect resumption setting includes a setting for ending the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect that has been performed overlapping the display position of the character in the character movement effect. As a result, as a special effect for making the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, invisible, execution of the character hiding effect can be terminated, and the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, can be restarted.

If it is not "resume display" in response to step AKS048 (step AKS048; No), the determination result in step AKS046 corresponds to "end of display", character movement effect end setting is performed (step AKS050), and character movement is performed. The processing during performance execution ends. The character movement effect end setting includes a setting for ending the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect and a setting for ending execution of the character movement effect. For example, the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02 is cleared and initialized. As a result, the execution of the character concealing effect can be terminated as the special effect of making the character moving effect, which is the specific effect, invisible, and the character moving effect, which is the specific effect, can be ended without restarting.

In the case of "without character hiding effect" instead of "with character hiding effect" in response to step AKS044 (step AKS044), or after character movement effect resuming setting is performed in step AKS049, the presence or absence of switching suggestion effect is determined. (Step AKS051). At this time, it is determined to be either "no switching suggestive effect" in which the switching suggestive effect is not executed or "switching suggestive effect is present" in which the switching suggestive effect is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of this determination is "there is a switching suggestion effect" (step AKS052). In the case of "no switching suggesting effect" instead of "with switching suggesting effect" (step ASK052; No), the character movement effect executing process is terminated. On the other hand, in the case of "there is a switching suggestive effect" (step AKS052; Yes), the switching suggestive effect execution setting is performed (step AKS053), and the character movement effect executing processing is terminated. An example of use of stored data relating to such character movement effect in-execution processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-25.

10-24 can refer to a character concealment effect execution determination table constructed using data stored in the ROM 121 when determining whether or not to execute a character concealment effect at step AKS043, for example. to In the character concealment effect execution determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers for character concealment effect execution determination included in the effect random numbers are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that will be updatable random numbers for determining execution of the character concealment effect by means of a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the character concealment effect execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute a concealment effect.

10-24 can refer to a character hiding control determination table constructed using data stored in the ROM 121 when determining the character hiding control in step AKS046, for example. do. In the character hiding control determination table, determination values to be compared with random numbers for character hiding control determination included in the random numbers for effect are set in advance. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is updatable by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122 and is a random number for determining the control during character concealment. It is possible to determine the control content to be the control during concealment.

10-24 can refer to a switching suggestive effect execution determination table constructed using data stored in the ROM 121 when determining whether or not there is a switching suggestive effect in step AKS051, for example. to In the switching suggestion performance execution determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random number for switching suggestion performance execution determination included in the performance random number is set in advance. The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data that is a random number for determining the execution of the switching suggestion performance that can be updated by a random counter or a random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122, and refers to the switching suggestion performance execution determination table. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute a suggestive effect. It should be noted that it may be determined to always execute the switching suggestive effect in response to the execution of the variable display that is the two-previous change when the movement effect type is either RSC or RSD. On the other hand, when the moving effect type is either RSA or RSB, it is determined whether or not to execute the switching suggestive effect at a predetermined rate in response to the execution of the variable display that is the two-time previous change. may be With this setting, the character movement effect is executed by switching between the case where the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern and the case where the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. It is possible to execute a false effect or a switching failure effect in which a switching suggestive effect is executed and a switching suggestive effect is executed in response to executing a character movement effect without switching.

FIG. 10-25(A) shows a determination example 002AKD31 regarding the presence/absence of character concealment effect. In the character moving effect executing process, it is possible to determine whether or not the character hiding effect is to be performed at step AKS043. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the character hiding effect at different ratios corresponding to the character being displayed, which is the character being displayed in the character moving effect. In decision example 002 AKD31, in response to the fact that the character being displayed is one of the characters CH01 to CH04, the decision rate of "no" to not execute the character concealment effect is 80%, and the "yes" to execute the character concealment effect is 80%. ” is 20%. In addition, in response to the fact that the character being displayed is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, the decision rate of "no" for not executing the character concealment effect is 70%, and the decision of "yes" to execute the character concealment effect is 70%. rate is 30%.

The display images of the characters CH01 to CH04 are the second pattern when the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern. Applicable. The display images of the characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed according to the effect pattern. Applicable. Therefore, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, the character hiding effect is executed at a higher rate than when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern. When the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, there is a possibility that the character movement effect is executed by switching to the first pattern when the switching suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, the player can easily expect that the switching suggesting effect will be executed, and the player will have a high expectation when the switching suggesting effect is executed. easy to get Therefore, when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, the character concealment effect can be executed at a low rate, thereby increasing the degree of attention and expectation for the switching suggestion effect and improving the game interest. can be done.

It should be noted that the character concealment effect may be executable when a preset concealment permitting condition is satisfied, and may not be executed when the concealment permitting condition is not satisfied. For example, in the range where the variable display that changes two times before is executed corresponding to the count value of the character display counter being "2", the concealment permission condition is not satisfied and the character concealment effect is not executed. may be restricted. During the execution of the variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2", there is a case where the first pattern and the second pattern are switched by executing the switching suggestion performance. In this case, if the character hiding effect is executed simultaneously with or overlaps with the switching suggesting effect, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggesting effect. Therefore, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the character hiding effect is not executed simultaneously or redundantly within the range of variable display in which the switching suggestive effect can be executed. By restricting the execution of the character hiding performance and the switching suggestive performance simultaneously or in duplicate, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestive performance and improve the game interest.

The presence or absence of the character hiding effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on which of the characters CH01 to CH04 the character being displayed is. The presence or absence of the character hiding effect may be determined at different determination rates depending on which of the characters CH11 to CH14 the character being displayed is. For example, when the character being displayed is the character CH01 or the character CH11, the determination rate is set so that the character hiding effect is performed at a higher rate than when the character being displayed is the character CH04 or the character CH14. good too. In the character movement effect, the determination rate of the effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the character CH04 or CH14 is displayed than when the character CH01 or CH11 is displayed. It is good if it is. The display of the character CH04 and the character CH14 does not change to display of other characters in the character movement effect. Therefore, when the character being displayed is a character that is difficult to change, such as the character CH04 or the character CH14, the character concealment effect is executed more than when the character being displayed is a character that is easily changed, such as the character CH01 or the character CH11. The decision rate may be set so that the percentage of decisions made is low. In this way, in the range where the performance mode of the character movement performance is the specific mode in which the performance mode of the character movement performance is difficult to change, the character hiding performance is executed and the ratio of becoming invisible is reduced more than when the performance mode of the character movement performance is other than the specific mode. A limit as a limit may be provided. Alternatively, a restriction may be provided as a limit that the character hiding effect is not executed and the character is not rendered invisible in a range in which the effect mode of the character movement effect does not change. As a result, when the character hiding effect is executed, the degree of attention of the player to the change in the effect mode of the character moving effect can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the character concealment effect in step AKS043 of the character movement effect executing process, the character concealment effect is executed in step AKS045 in response to the determination result of "character concealment effect present" in step AKS044. By setting the concealment presentation start setting, control is performed so that execution of the character concealment presentation can be started. For example, an effect control pattern for the character concealing effect, which is stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, is read in correspondence with the character concealing effect. In response to the control data included in the effect control pattern, by sending an effect execution instruction to the display control unit 123, the concealed display CK01 is performed on the screen of the image display device 5, and execution of the character concealed effect is started. Let it be. When starting execution of the character concealment presentation, the concealment presentation flag is set to an ON state. Data identifiably indicating the concealment effect flag can be stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02.

FIG. 10-25(B) shows a determination example 002AKD32 of the control when hiding the character. In the character moving effect executing process, it is possible to determine the character hiding time control at step AKS046. At this time, it is sufficient if the presence or absence of the character concealment presentation effect can be determined at different ratios corresponding to the character being concealed, which is the character that is concealed in the character concealment presentation. Similar to the character displayed in the character movement effect, the hidden character uses data indicating the effect pattern and data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02. It is sufficient if it can be specified by In decision example 002 AKD32, the determination rate of "Continue concealment" to continue the character concealment effect is 30%, corresponding to the fact that the concealed character is one of CH01 to CH04. The decision rate of "resume display" for resuming the display of the character in the movement effect is 20%, and the decision rate of "end display" to end the display of the character in the character movement effect together with the end of the character concealment effect is 50%. . Further, in response to the fact that the character being concealed is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, the decision rate of "Continue concealment" for continuing the character concealment effect is 20%, and the character concealment effect is ended and the character movement effect is performed. The determination rate of "resume display" for resuming the display of the character is 70%, and the determination rate of "end display" for ending the display of the character in the character movement presentation together with the end of the character concealment presentation is 10%.

The display images of the characters CH01 to CH04 are the second pattern when the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern. Applicable. The display images of the characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed according to the effect pattern. Applicable. Therefore, when the character hiding effect is executed while the character movement effect is being executed in the first pattern and the character becomes invisible, the character is more likely to become invisible when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern. The character concealing performance is ended at a higher rate than when the concealing performance is executed and the character becomes invisible, and the display of the character in the character movement performance is resumed. In addition, when the character hiding effect is executed while the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern and the character becomes invisible, the character is more likely to be invisible when the character movement effect is being executed in the first pattern. The display of the character in the character movement performance ends with the end of the character concealment performance at a higher rate than when the concealment performance is executed and becomes invisible. In this way, when the character hiding effect, which is a special effect, is executed and the player becomes invisible after starting the execution of the character moving effect, which is a specific effect, in the first pattern, the character moving effect, which is a specific effect, is restarted. It is possible. On the other hand, in the second pattern, when the character hiding effect as a special effect is executed after the execution of the character moving effect as a special effect is started and the visual recognition becomes invisible, the character moving effect as a specific effect is restarted. It is possible to exit without

The effect control CPU 120 sets the character movement effect restart setting in step AKS049 in response to the determination result in step AKS048 when the character hiding time control is determined to be "resume display" in step AKS046 of the character movement effect executing process. Thus, the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect is ended, and the character display in the character movement effect is resumable. For example, by sending an instruction to the display control unit 123 to execute an effect prepared in advance corresponding to "resume display" in the character concealment control, the concealment display CK01 is erased on the screen of the image display device 5, and the character is displayed. It is sufficient to restart the display of the character in the moving effect. If the character displayed in the character movement effect can be specified by using the data indicating the effect pattern and the data indicating the count value of the character display counter among the data stored in the character movement effect data storage unit 002AKM02. good. Also, when the execution of the character concealment effect is finished, the concealment effect flag is cleared and turned off. The character to be displayed in the character moving effect when the execution of the character hiding effect is finished is different from the character when the character hiding effect is executed after starting the execution of the character moving effect and becomes invisible. Sometimes. For example, after starting execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern RPB1-2-3-4 included in the movement effect type RSB shown in FIG. When the character hiding effect is executed, the display of the character CH11 becomes invisible. In this case, when the execution of the character concealment effect is completed in response to the start of the variable display that is the two-previous change and the display of the character in the character movement effect is resumed, the character CH12 different from the character CH11 is displayed. is resumed. In this way, when the character hiding effect, which is a special effect, is executed after the execution of the character movement effect, which is a specific effect, is started in the first pattern and the character becomes invisible, the first pattern having a different effect mode can be used. It may be possible to restart the character movement effect that is the specific effect.

Note that the character concealment effect may be controlled so that the effect execution ends when a preset concealment end condition is met, independently of the determination rate of the character concealment time control. For example, after starting execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern included in one of the movement effect types RSC and RSD, when the character concealment effect is executed and the character becomes invisible, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2", in the range where the variable display that changes two times before is executed, the concealment end condition is satisfied and the execution of the character concealment effect is terminated. good. During the execution of the variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2", there is a case where the first pattern and the second pattern are switched by executing the switching suggestion performance. In this case, if the character hiding effect is executed simultaneously with or overlaps with the switching suggesting effect, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the switching suggesting effect. Therefore, in the range of the variable display that switches between the first pattern and the second pattern by executing the switching suggestive effect, a limit is provided as a limit to end the character hiding effect so as not to be executed simultaneously or overlap. good too. By restricting the execution of the character hiding performance and the switching suggestive performance simultaneously or in duplicate, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching suggestive performance and improve the game interest.

The concealment end condition may be satisfied when the count value of the character display counter is "1" and the variable display that is the previous change is executed. In this way, when the character concealing effect is executed and the character becomes invisible after the character movement effect is started, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1", and the character display counter changes one time before. In the range in which such variable display is performed, a restriction may be provided as a limit such that the concealment end condition is met and the execution of the character concealment presentation is terminated. The variable display in which the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "1" and is changed the previous time, the effect mode of the character movement effect in the first pattern is inherited after the next variable display, or the effect mode in the second pattern is changed. This is a branching point as to whether or not to inherit the effect mode of the character movement effect after the next variable display. In this case, if the character hiding effect is executed and the character moving effect becomes invisible, it may be difficult to increase the player's attention to the character moving effect. Therefore, a limitation may be provided as a limit to end the character hiding effect so as not to be executed within the range of the variable display branching whether the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited or not inherited. To increase the interest of a player in a character movement performance by restricting execution of a character hiding performance in a variable display branching whether the performance mode of the character movement performance is inherited or not inherited. be able to.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the character movement effect in step AKS050 in response to the determination result in step AKS048 when the character hiding time control is determined to be "end of display" in step AKS046 of the character movement effect in-execution process. As a result, the concealment display CK01 in the character concealment effect is terminated, and the character display in the character movement effect is also controlled to be terminated. For example, when the character concealment control sends to the display control unit 123 an instruction to end a presentation prepared in advance corresponding to "end of display", the concealed display CK01 is erased on the screen of the image display device 5, and The character display in the character movement effect may also be erased. When the execution of the character hiding effect and the character moving effect is finished, the data stored in the character moving effect data storage unit 002AKM02 may be cleared and initialized.

FIG. 10-25(C) shows a decision example 002AKD33 regarding the presence/absence of the switching suggestion effect. In the processing during execution of character movement effect, it is possible to determine whether or not the switching suggestion effect is effected in step AKS051. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the switching suggestion effect at different ratios corresponding to the character being displayed, which is the character being displayed in the character movement effect. In decision example 002 AKD33, the decision rate of "no" for not executing the switching suggestion effect is 90%, and the decision rate for "yes" to perform the switching suggestion effect is 90%, corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is the character CH01. 10%. Corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is the character CH02, the decision rate of "no" to not execute the switching suggestion effect is 85%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the switching suggestion effect is 15%. Corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is the character CH03, the decision rate of "no" to not execute the switching suggestion effect is 75%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the switching suggestion effect is 25%. Corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is the character CH04, the decision rate of "no" to not execute the switching suggestion effect is 60%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the switching suggestion effect is 40%.

It should be noted that "none" may be determined so as not to execute the switching suggestion effect, corresponding to the fact that the character being displayed is one of the characters CH11 to CH14. The display images of the characters CH01 to CH04 are the second pattern when the character movement effect is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed according to the effect pattern. Applicable. The display images of the characters CH11 to CH14 are the first pattern when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the target of the determination, and the character movement effect is executed according to the effect pattern. Applicable. Therefore, by executing the switching suggestive effect at a predetermined rate while the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, it is possible to suggest switching to the first pattern. When the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, there is a possibility of executing the character movement effect by switching to the first pattern when the switching suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the character movement effect is being executed in the second pattern, the player can easily expect that the switching suggesting effect will be executed, and the player will have a high expectation when the switching suggesting effect is executed. easy to get Therefore, when the character movement performance is executed in the second pattern, the switching suggestion performance can be executed at a predetermined rate, thereby increasing the degree of attention and expectation for the switching suggestion performance and improving the game interest. can be done.

The switching suggestion effect may be executable when a preset switching suggestion condition is established. For example, even if the switching suggestion condition is established and the switching suggestion effect can be executed in the range where the variable display that changes two times before is executed corresponding to the count value of the character display counter being "2". good. The first pattern and the second pattern may be switched during execution of the variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2". In this case, by executing the switching suggestive effect, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching of the effect mode in the character movement effect, thereby improving the game interest.

The switching suggestion condition is that after starting execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern included in one of the movement effect types RSC and RSD, the count value of the character display counter corresponds to "2", and two times before. It may be established when a variable display that is variable is executed. Execution of variable display in which the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2" after starting the execution of the character movement effect in the effect pattern included in one of the movement effect types RSC and RSD. Inside, a first pattern and a second pattern are switched. In this case, by executing the switching suggestive effect, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the switching of the effect mode in the character movement effect, thereby improving the game interest. On the other hand, after the execution of the character movement effect is started in the effect pattern included in one of the movement effect types RSA and RSB, the count value of the character display counter changes two times before corresponding to "2". When such a variable display is executed, it may be possible to execute the switching suggestive effect at a predetermined rate, such as determining whether or not to perform the switching suggestive effect at a decision rate such as the determination example 002AKD33. In this way, when the first pattern and the second pattern are switched after the execution of the character movement effect is started, the switching suggestion effect can always be executed, and the first pattern and the second pattern cannot be switched. In this case, there may be a case where the switching suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined ratio and a case where it is not executed. As a result, when the switching suggestive effect is executed, the player's attention to whether or not the effect mode in the character movement effect can be switched can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 10-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing during timer effect execution. The timer effect in-execution process is included in the process that can be called from the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIG. be. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timer effect flag is ON when the timer effect executing process is executed (step AKS061). When the timer effect flag is off (step AKS061; No), the timer effect in-execution process is terminated in response to the fact that neither the timer effect nor the timer standby effect is being executed.

When the timer effect flag is ON corresponding to step AKS061 (step AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not the timer effect target variation starts (step AKS062). At step AKS062, for example, the count value of the remaining number counter stored in the timer effect data storage unit 002AKM03 is updated by subtracting one. At this time, if the count value of the remaining number counter after the update is "0", it is determined that the timer effect target variation has started. On the other hand, if the count value of the remaining number counter after the update is other than "0", it is determined that the timer effect object fluctuation start has not occurred.

In response to step AKS062, when the timer effect target variation starts (step AKS062; Yes), the timer effect execution setting is performed (step AKS063), and the timer effect executing process ends.

When it is not the start of the timer effect target variation corresponding to step AKS062 (step AKS062; No), the timer standby effect executing setting is performed (step AKS064), and the timer effect executing process ends.

FIG. 10-27 is a flow chart showing an example of effect symbol variation start processing. The effect symbol variation start process is included in the process that can be called from the effect control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. It can be executed in step S155. The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol and the like when the effect symbol variation start process is executed (step ASK101). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the variable display contents such as the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command and the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the variable display result notification command are included in the special symbol normal processing P_TNORMAL corresponding to the special symbol process code 00 [H] in step S112 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. When the process is executed, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the time of starting the fluctuation of the special symbols. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that designates the variable display result determined using the random number MR1-1 for special symbol determination and the random number MR2-1 for winning symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (losing)", "reach (losing)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". I wish I had.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", different (mismatched) performance symbols in the "left" and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5R are determined as final stop symbols. When the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the same (matching) effect symbol is determined as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In this case, among the confirmed effect symbols, the medium confirmed effect pattern stopped and displayed in the "middle" effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined to be a different effect pattern from the left and right confirmed effect symbols. be done. If the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", the same ( (matching) is determined as the final stop symbol. At this time, the normal pattern (for example, even It suffices if it is determined which of the production design showing) and the probability variation design (for example, the production design showing an odd number) to be the fixed production design. In the promotion performance during the big win, a combination of performance symbols (non-probability variable big win combination) that reminds the big win but not the probability variable state is once stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, and then the big win game state or the big win game state. It is an effect that informs whether or not it will be in a probability changing state at the end of. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", a fixed performance symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. When it is determined that the variable display contents are ``probability variation (big hit)'' and promotion performance during the big win is not executed, the fixed performance pattern is determined from a plurality of types of probability variation patterns. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion performance during the big win even if the variable display content is ``probability variation (big win)'', the fixed performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of kinds of normal patterns. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion performance during the big win from being executed even though the variable probability symbols are all derived and displayed as the fixed performance symbols, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability variation promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a promotion effect during a big hit. . In the re-lottery production, if the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)" or "probability variation (big hit)", it is determined whether to execute the probability variation promotion production such as re-lottery production and promotion production during the jackpot. may be done. In the re-lottery performance, it is once difficult or impossible to recognize that the performance pattern of the non-probability variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbols is once displayed during the variable display of the performance symbols, and that control to the probability variable state is made difficult or unrecognizable, By variably displaying (re-varying) the performance symbols again and stop-displaying the performance symbols of the probability variable big hit combination consisting of the same probability variable symbols, the player can be notified in a recognizable manner that the performance symbols are controlled to the variable probability state. In some cases, the effect symbols of the non-probability variable big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the effect symbols are changed again in the re-lottery effect, so that the control to the probability change state may not be notified. If it is decided to execute the re-lottery effect, the combination of the effect patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed before the execution of the re-lottery effect is temporarily made difficult or unrecognizable, and the effect pattern is again variablely displayed (re- A player can be recognizably informed that control is performed in a variable probability state by stop-displaying performance symbols of a variable probability big hit combination consisting of the same variable probability symbols. In some cases, the effect symbols of the non-probability variable big hit combination are stopped and displayed after the effect symbols are changed again in the re-lottery effect, so that the control to the probability change state may not be notified. When it is determined to execute the re-lottery performance, the combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before executing the re-lottery performance.

After determining the final stop pattern and the like in step AKS101, the presence or absence of the active display change effect is determined (step AKS102). At this time, either "no active display change effect" in which the active display change effect is not executed or "active display change effect present" in which the active display change effect is executed is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of this determination is "with active display change effect" (step AKS103). In the case of "with active display change effect" (step AKS103; Yes), the pattern for active display change effect is determined (step AKS104).

In the case of "no active display change effect" instead of "with active display change effect" in response to step AKS103 (step AKS103; No), after determining the pattern for active display change effect at step AKS104, super reach and It is determined whether or not there is "super reach" for executing a different reach effect (step AKS105). It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a reach effect that becomes super reach, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. In step AKS105, it is determined whether it is "with super reach" in which the ready-to-win effect is executed or "without super reach" in which the ready-to-reach effect is not executed. Then, in the case of "with super reach" (step AKS105; Yes), the post-reach effect is determined (step AKS106).

In the case of "without super reach" instead of "with super reach" corresponding to step AKS105 (step AKS105; No), after determining the effect after reach at step AKS106, the effect control pattern is prepared in advance. (step AKS107). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of production control patterns prepared as a special figure fluctuation time production control pattern in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. do. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns as the active display change effect control pattern in response to the determination result of the active display change effect pattern in step AKS104, and sets it as the usage pattern. You may One of a plurality of effect control patterns prepared as the post-reach effect control pattern may be selected and set as a usage pattern in accordance with the determination result of the effect after reach in step AKS106. In addition, a separate production control pattern may be set as a production control pattern corresponding to a special figure fluctuation production control pattern, an active display change production control pattern, a reach after production control pattern, and other production control patterns, or each production 1 effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings may be set.

When the production control pattern is determined by step AKS107, for example, corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, such as the production control timer setting unit of RAM122, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area is set (step AKS108). Then, a setting is made for starting the variation of performance symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS109). At this time, for example, the display list specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern such as the effect control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation determined by step AKS 107 and the individual drawing command are supplied to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Then, the variation of the performance symbols can be started in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5 . After that, the value of the effect control process code is updated to 02[H] corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation (step AKS110), and the effect symbol change start process is completed.

FIG. 10-28(A) shows a determination example 002AKD51 regarding the presence or absence of the effect of the active display change effect. In the effect symbol variation start process, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform an active display change effect in step AKS104. At this time, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine the presence or absence of the active display change effect at different ratios corresponding to the variable display contents. In decision example 002 AKD51, in response to the variable display content being "non-reach (loss)", the determination rate of "none" not executing the active display change effect is 99%, and the active display change effect is executed. The decision rate of "yes" is 1%. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the decision rate of "no" not executing the active display change effect is 50%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the active display change effect. is 50%. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display content is "non-variable (big hit)", the decision rate of "no" not executing the active display change effect is 25%, and the decision of "yes" to execute the active display change effect. rate is 75%. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", the decision rate of "no" not executing the active display change effect is 20%, and the decision rate of "yes" to execute the active display change effect. is 80%. With such a setting, when the active display change effect is executed, the player has a higher expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, than when the active display change effect is not executed. Become. In addition, when the active display change effect is executed by arbitrary setting, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is more advantageous than the case where the active display change effect is not executed. You can make it higher. In this way, the active display change effect included in the change effect can be appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the execution of the active display change effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

FIG. 10-28(B) shows a determination example 002AKD52 of the production pattern to be the active display change production pattern. In this embodiment, four production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 are prepared in advance as a plurality of production patterns that can be determined as active display change production patterns. The number of production patterns that can be determined as patterns for active display change production may be a plurality of patterns based on an arbitrary design. The effect modes of the active display change effect are set differently corresponding to the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1 and YAP2-2.

FIG. 10-28(C) shows a configuration example of effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1, and YAP2-2 that can be determined as patterns for active display change effect. The pre-change display corresponding to each effect pattern indicates the display mode of the active display displayed before the active display change effect is executed. Effect patterns YAP1-1 and YAP1-2 correspond to the effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed once in the active display change effect. Effect patterns YAP2-1 and YAP2-2 correspond to an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed twice in the active display change effect. Effect pattern YAP1-1 has the final display mode of active display as display image AKE11 informing a message of "?", and effect patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1 have the final display mode of active display as "chance". A display image AKE12 announcing the message of ``Heat'' is set as the display image AKE12 announcing the message of ``Super heat'' as the final display mode of the effect pattern YAP2-2.

In the decision example 002AKD52 of FIG. 10-28 (B), the variable display contents correspond to "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability variation (big hit)", and "probability variation (big hit)" , it is sufficient if it becomes possible to determine different production patterns. Also, it may be possible to determine the effect pattern at different ratios corresponding to the variable display contents. For example, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the determination rate of the production pattern YAP1-1 as the active display change production pattern is 100%, and the production patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1, YAP2 The decision rate of -2 is 0%. Therefore, if the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", the effect pattern YAP1-1 is determined as the active display change effect pattern, and the effect patterns YAP1-2, YAP2-1 and YAP2-2 are not determined. In this way, the active display change effect is the first effect in the range where the variable display content is the most disadvantageous variable display content for the player in the case where the variable display content is "non-reach (losing)", which is not controlled to the jackpot game state. A restriction is provided as a limit that the pattern can be executed but not executed in the second effect pattern. Also, if the variable display content is "ready (losing)", the production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1 can be determined as patterns for active display change production, and the production pattern YAP2-2 cannot be determined. become. In this manner, a limitation is provided as a limit that the active display change effect is not executed in the third effect pattern in the range where the variable display content is "ready (losing)". When the variable display contents are disadvantageous to the player, the player is enhanced by the active display change performance by restricting the execution of the active display change performance in the second performance pattern and the third performance pattern. It is possible to improve the interest in the game by appropriately executing the active display change effect so that the expectation of the game is less likely to decline.

In the determination example 002 AKD52 in FIG. 10-28 (B), for example, when the variable display content is “probability variation (big hit)”, the variable display content is “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non- The effect pattern YAP2-2 is determined as the active display change effect pattern at a higher decision rate than when it is one of the "probability variation (big hit)". Further, when the variable display content is "variable probability (big hit)", the decision rate of the production pattern YAP2-2 is higher than the decision rates of the other production patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, YAP2-1. rate. When the variable display content is "non-probability variation (big hit)", the decision rate is lower than when the variable display content is "probability variation (big hit)", and the same production patterns YAP1-2 and YAP2-1. At the determination rate of 30%, the effect pattern YAP2-2 is determined. With such settings, when the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2, the active display change effect is executed in any one of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. The degree of expectation to be controlled to the probability variable state, which is a special state advantageous to the player different from the advantageous state, is higher than in the case. In addition, when the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2 by arbitrary setting, the active display change effect is executed in one of the effect patterns YAP1-1, YAP1-2, and YAP2-1. The degree of expectation of being controlled to the variable probability state, which is a special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the advantageous state, may be higher than in the case of .

FIG. 10-29(A) shows a determination example 002AKD61 of the post-reach effect. In the effect symbol variation start process, it is possible to determine the after-reach effect in step AKS106. At this time, it suffices if the post-reach effect can be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. For example, when the variable display result is “losing”, the decision rate of background display effects is 50%, the decision rate of step-up effects is 30%, and the decision rate of story effects is 20%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the determination rate of background display effects is 20%, the determination rate of step-up effects is 30%, and the determination rate of story effects is 50%. . By such setting, when the story performance is executed as the post-reach performance, the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state for the player as compared with the case where the background display performance and the step-up performance are executed. When the degree of expectation increases and the step-up performance is executed as the performance after ready-to-win, the expectation is that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than when the background display performance is executed. degree increases. In addition, by arbitrary setting, when the story production is executed as the post-reach production, it is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, as compared with the case where the background display production and the step-up production are executed. In addition, when the step-up performance is executed as the post-ready performance, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than when the background display performance is executed. Expectations may be raised. In this way, by varying the degree of expectation for a big win according to the execution contents of the after-reach performance, the after-reach performance is appropriately executed so as to increase the player's attention to the after-reach performance, thereby enhancing the amusement of the game. be able to.

FIG. 10-29(B) shows a determination example 002AKD62 of the transparent design pattern. In this embodiment, three pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 are prepared in advance as a plurality of transition patterns that can be displayed by transparently displaying performance patterns that serve as identification information. The number of transition patterns that can be displayed through the production pattern may be a plurality of patterns based on an arbitrary design. In the performance symbol variation start process, when the performance after reach is determined in step AKS106, it is sufficient that the corresponding symbol transmission pattern can be determined. In determination example 002 AKD62, it is possible to determine a different symbol transmission pattern corresponding to the post-reach effect. For example, when the post-reach effect is the background display effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP1 is determined. When the post-reach effect is the step-up effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP2 is determined. When the post-reach effect is the story effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP3 is determined. The pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 have different transmittance settings when the performance patterns are displayed in a transparent manner. The background display performance is controlled to a jackpot game state which is an advantageous state by displaying any one of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 as the background image when the performance symbols are transmitted according to the symbol transmission pattern TSP1. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that The step-up performance is controlled to a big win game state which is an advantageous state by displaying display images AKG1 to AKG4 so as to be changeable according to the number of steps when the performance symbols are transmitted according to the symbol transmission pattern TSP2. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be made. In the story performance, the display images AKH11 to AKH44 are displayed in accordance with the content of the progress of a series of stories while the performance symbols are transmitted according to the symbol transmission pattern TSP3, thereby creating an advantageous jackpot game state. Controlled expectations can be suggested.

FIG. 10-30 shows a configuration example of an effect control pattern. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control pattern can be determined in step AKS107. For example, the production control pattern, which is the production control pattern at the time of special figure fluctuation, executes various productions from the start of the variable display of the production pattern to the end in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. and control data used to control the The control data that constitutes the performance control data includes process data including performance control process timer judgment values, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end codes, etc. It can be set as divided into blocks. The production control process timer determination value is a judgment value that is compared with the production control process timer value. The production control process timer value is the time value of the production control process timer. In place of the production control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined production control command is received from the main board 11, or a prescribed process is executed as a process for controlling the production operation in the production control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of effect control, etc., may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the display mode of each effect symbol during variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates display control of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 . The audio control data includes, for example, data indicating the output mode of the sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the variable display of the production pattern. That is, the audio control data is data that designates audio output control from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the control of the lighting mode of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's actions, such as a tilting operation on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and each operation. Data indicating control of the effect mode according to detection of the action of the player, such as data designating the content of control of the effect mode in the case of valid detection, is included. The vibration control data includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor that vibrates the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. That is, the vibration control data is data that designates vibration mode control of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

It should be noted that these control data are not necessarily included in all the production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data according to the content of the production operation by each production control pattern. There may be Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may differ according to the content of the production operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while other process data includes some of these data. you can Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

FIG. 10-31 is a flow chart showing an example of processing during effect symbol fluctuation. The effect symbol changing process is included in the process that can be called from the effect control process process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9(A). It can be executed in step S155. The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has passed, for example, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc., when the performance symbol fluctuation processing is executed. is determined (step AKS121). At this time, the timing value of the production control process timer is updated by, for example, subtracting 1, and the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it is determined that the variable display time has passed.

If the variable display period has not elapsed in response to step AKS121 (step AKS121; No), it is determined whether or not it is the character movement effect period (step AKS122). The character movement effect period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern for the character movement effect. If it is the character movement effect period (step AKS122; Yes), character movement effect control is performed (step AKS123). As a result, it is possible to execute the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, before the variable display that is the object of determination. In addition, after the variable display that is the target of determination, the effect mode of the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, can be inherited and executed. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the character movement effect (step AKS124). The character movement effect end timing may be, for example, the timing when a preset effect end condition is established in the effect control pattern for the character movement effect. When it is time to end the character movement effect (step AKS124; Yes), character movement effect end control is performed (step AKS125). Thus, when the character movement effect is executed in the first pattern, it is possible to end after inheriting the effect mode of the character movement effect after the variable display that is the object of determination. Further, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern, it is possible to end the character movement effect without inheriting the character movement effect after the variable display that is the target of the determination.

If it is not the character movement effect period corresponding to step ASK122 (step AKS122; No), or if it is not the character movement effect end timing corresponding to step AKS124 (step AKS124; No), or control by step ASK125 is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not it is the timer-related effect period (step AKS126). The timer-related effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern for the timer effect as a period during which the timer effect and the timer standby effect can be executed. When it is the timer-related effect period (step AKS126; Yes), timer-related effect control is performed (step AKS127). As a result, it is possible to execute the timer standby effect including the specific display corresponding to the variable display before the variable display that is the object of determination. Also, in the variable display that is the object of determination, it is possible to execute a timer effect including a specific display corresponding to the variable display. At this time, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the timer effect (step AKS128). The end timing of the timer effect may be, for example, the timing when a preset effect end condition is established in the effect control pattern for the timer effect. When it is time to end the timer effect (step AKS128; Yes), timer effect end control is performed (step AKS129). As a result, the timer effect can be terminated after the specific display corresponding to the variable display that is the object of determination is displayed for a short period or a long period.

If it is not a timer related effect period corresponding to step AKS126 (step AKS126; No), if it is not the timer effect end timing in step AKS128 (step AKS128; No), or after control by step AKS129, active display It is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step AKS130). The active display change effect period may be predetermined as a period during which the active display change effect can be executed, for example, in the effect control pattern for the active display change effect. When it is the active display change effect period (step AKS130; Yes), active display change effect control is performed (step AKS131). As a result, it is possible to execute the change performance of changing the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display from the first mode to the second mode with a higher expectation of big hit than the first mode. Further, the control of step AKS131 includes control for enabling execution of the history suggestion effect. For example, when the display mode of the active display is changed by the active display change effect as the change effect, it is possible to execute the history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change after the active display change effect is started. Just do it.

If it is not the active display change effect period at step AKS130 (step AKS130; No), after the control at step AKS131, it is determined whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS132). The reach production period is a period during which it is possible to execute a reach production that is a special production such as a reach production that is normal reach, a production after reach, a reach development production, a reach production that is super reach, etc. For example, in the special figure fluctuation production control pattern, It is sufficient if it is determined in advance. When it is the ready-to-win effect period (step AKS132; Yes), ready-to-win effect control is performed (step AKS133).

In the ready-to-win effect control of step AKS133, for example, the effect symbols that can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, such as the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are displayed. , may include a pattern transparency control that enables the transparent display. In this case, for example, in a specific period during which the after-reach production is executed, the production pattern serving as identification information can be displayed by being made transparent according to the pattern transmission pattern serving as the transition pattern. In addition, when the performance pattern is transparent, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot game state by displaying the performance image that is the special image in the post-reach performance, such as the background display performance, the step-up performance, and the story performance. do.

When pattern transmission control is executed as the ready-to-win effect control in step AKS133, a special effect may be executed in which the effect pattern serving as identification information is transparently displayed according to the pattern transmission pattern serving as a different transition pattern. . In this case, the special effect includes, for example, a first special effect that can display the effect symbol serving as identification information from the start to the end of the specific period in a specific period in which the after-reach effect is executed with a first transmittance, and a specific period. can be displayed with a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance, and the effect symbol that becomes the identification information can be displayed at the end of the specific period. and a second special effect that can be displayed with a third transmittance higher than the transmittance. Then, the determination rate of the special performance is set so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the second special performance is executed than when the first special performance is executed. It is good if there is.

The ready-to-win effect control of step AKS133 may include switching effect control when the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed. In this case, the first character display effect included in the first effect and the second character display effect included in the second effect switched after the execution of the first effect as the suggestive effect suggesting the control to the jackpot game state. Make it possible to perform and Then, a first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect such as a first character introducing effect and a second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect such as a second character introducing effect are made executable. As the execution control of the corresponding performance including the first corresponding performance and the second corresponding performance, the second corresponding performance can be executed during the execution of the first performance before switching from the first performance to the second performance. do.

If it is not a reach effect period corresponding to step AKS132 (step AKS132; No), after control by step AKS133, for example, based on the setting of control data in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, Control is performed to execute an arbitrary effect during other variable displays, including variable display control of effect symbols (step AKS134), and the process during effect symbol changes is completed.

When the variable display time elapses corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step AKS135). When the design determination command is not received (step AKS135; No), the process during effect design fluctuation is completed and waits. In addition, after the variable display time has passed, it is determined that the pattern confirmation command has not been received normally in response to the passage of the predetermined time without receiving the pattern confirmation command, and predetermined error processing is executed. may When the pattern confirmation command is received (step AKS135; Yes), for example, by supplying a drawing command corresponding to the pattern confirmation from the production control CPU 120 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the production pattern is changed. Control is performed to stop and display the final stop symbol that is the display result in the display (step AKS136). As a result, the variable display result of the production pattern that becomes the fixed production pattern is derived and displayed.

Following the control by step AKS136, a predetermined fixed time is set as a win start designation command reception waiting time (step AKS137). The hit start designation command reception waiting time is executed in step S155 when the effect control process code loaded by step S153 of the effect control process S_CPROC shown in FIG. 9A is 03 [H]. It is used as a standby time in the effect symbol variation stop process. Also, the effect control process code is updated to 03[H] corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (step AKS138), and the effect symbol variation process ends.

FIGS. 10-32 to 10-36 show an effect execution example when the character movement effect is executed. Among them, FIG. 10-32 shows an effect execution example in the case where execution of the character movement effect is started based on the occurrence of the starting prize. The character movement effect can be executed when the starting winning occurs based on the determination result of step AKS022 of the character movement effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-13. In the production execution example 002AK101 shown in FIG. 10-32(A), the production design is variablely displayed, and the production design is displayed in the production design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right". When all symbols are fluctuating, the pending display corresponding to the pending memory number "2" is performed in the pending memory area AKB0. At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-32(B), a start prize is generated by the game ball passing through the first start area at the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A. Based on the occurrence of such a starting winning, it is determined in step AKS022 of the character movement effect determination process that the character movement effect is to be executed. In addition, since the pending memory number is updated to "3" in response to the occurrence of the starting prize, the variable display being executed is executed three times before the variable display that is the object of judgment. . Therefore, the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK101 is the 3rd previous variation.

Based on the determination result of step AKS022, the type of movement effect is determined in step AKS024, and the effect pattern to be the character movement effect pattern is determined in step AKS025. Subsequently, the execution of the character movement effect is started by the character movement effect start setting in step AKS026. For example, among the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSA shown in FIG. When the effect pattern for displaying CH01 is determined, the execution of the character movement effect by displaying the character CH01 like the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C1) is started. Further, among the plurality of effect patterns included in the movement effect type RSB shown in FIG. 16, any of the effect patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-4-4-4 will be changed three times before. When the effect pattern for displaying the character CH11 in the variable display is determined, execution of the character movement effect by displaying the character CH11 like the effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2) is started. Also in the case of the movement effect type RSC, among the plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. An effect pattern for displaying CH11 can be determined. In the case of the moving effect type RSD, one of the effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-4-4-4 among the plurality of effect patterns shown in FIG. It becomes possible to determine the effect pattern for displaying the character CH01 in the variable display.

During execution of the character movement effect, a switching suggestion is made by step AKS051 based on the determination that the character movement effect flag is ON by step AKS041 of the processing during execution of character movement effect shown in FIG. 10-24. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of production. For example, in the case of the moving effect type RSA, in response to the execution of the variable display that changes two times before, the determination rate corresponding to the character being displayed, such as the determination example 002AKD33 shown in FIG. 10-25(C) , it may be determined whether or not to execute the switching suggestion effect. Further, in the case of the moving effect type RSD, it may be determined to always execute the switching suggestive effect in response to the execution of the variable display that is the two-time previous change.

FIG. 10-33 shows an effect execution example in the case where the character movement effect and the like continuing from the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C1) are executed. FIGS. 10-33(A) and 10-33(B) show the case where the variable display with the 2nd-previous change is executed after the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK102 is completed. Of these, an effect execution example is shown in which the switching suggestion effect and the character hiding effect are not executed. Effect execution example 002AK111 shown in FIG. 10-33(A) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH01, which is the same as the effect execution example 002AK102, in which the character CH01 is displayed in the variable display that changes two times before. A moving effect is being executed. Effect execution example 002AK112 shown in FIG. 10-33(B) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying character CH02, which is different from the effect execution example 002AK102, in which the character CH02 is displayed in the variable display that changes two times before. A moving effect is being executed. In addition, it is sufficient that an effect image showing the reachable display position is displayed in a recognizable manner. In the case of the moving effect type RSA, if any of the effect patterns RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect to display the character CH01, which is the same as the previous change. Further, in the case of the moving effect type RSA, if any of the effect patterns RPA1-2-2 to RPA1-2-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which a character CH02 different from the character CH01 that has changed three times before is displayed.

In FIG. 10-33(C), following the end of the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. It shows an effect execution example 002AK113 when the switching suggestion effect is executed. In this effect execution example 002AK113, a switching suggestion effect is executed by a display image forming the effect display CJ01.

The switching suggestion effect may be executable in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. When it is determined in step AKS051 of the character movement effect executing process shown in FIG. Either may be determinable. In this case, the effect pattern that is the switching suggestion effect pattern may be determined at a different determination rate corresponding to the effect pattern that is the character movement effect pattern. For example, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSD is the character moving effect pattern, the first suggesting effect pattern that can be determined as the switching suggesting effect pattern at a high decision rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The determination rate may be set so that the switching suggestion rendering pattern can be determined at a low determination rate when is the character movement rendering pattern. Further, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSD is the character moving effect pattern, the second suggesting effect pattern that can be determined as the switching suggesting effect pattern at a low decision rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The determination rate may be set so that the switching suggestion rendering pattern can be determined at a high determination rate when is the character movement rendering pattern. With such a setting, when the switching suggestion performance is executed in the first suggestion performance pattern, the second pattern is executed more than the case where the switching suggestion performance is executed in the second suggestion performance pattern. The ratio of executing the character movement effect as the started specific effect by switching to the first pattern increases. In this way, it may be possible to switch the character movement effect from the second pattern to the first pattern at different ratios depending on which one of the plurality of effect modes the switching suggestion effect is.

During execution of the character movement effect, the character is hidden in step AKS043 based on the determination that the character movement effect flag is ON in step AKS041 of the processing during character movement effect execution shown in FIG. 10-24. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of production. In this case, whether or not to execute the character hiding effect may be determined with a determination rate corresponding to the character being displayed, such as the determination example 002AK31 shown in FIG. 10-25(A).

In FIG. 10-33(D), following the end of the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK102 shown in FIG. 002AK114 shows an effect execution example 002AK114 when the character hiding effect is executed. In this effect execution example 002AK114, the character concealment effect is executed by the effect image forming the concealment display CK01.

The character hiding effect may be executable in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. When it is decided in step AKS043 of the character movement effect executing process shown in FIG. may be determinable. In this case, the effect pattern that is the pattern for concealing effect may be determined at a different determination rate corresponding to the effect pattern that is the pattern for character movement effect. For example, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB is the character moving effect pattern, the first concealed display pattern that can be determined as the concealed effect pattern with a high determination rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The determination rate may be set so that the pattern for the character movement effect can be determined to the pattern for the concealment effect at a low determination rate. Further, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB is the character moving effect pattern, the second concealed display pattern that can be determined as the concealed effect pattern at a low determination rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The determination rate may be set so that the pattern for the character movement effect can be determined to be the pattern for the concealment effect at a high determination rate.

The character hiding effect may be executed in response to any one of a plurality of timings such as the start of variable display, the execution of variable display, and the end of variable display. When it is decided to execute the character hiding effect in step AKS043 of the character moving effect executing process shown in FIG. There may be. Depending on whether or not the character displayed in the character moving effect changes, the execution timing of the character hiding effect may be determined at different rates among a plurality of timings. With such a setting, when the character hiding effect is executed at the first timing, it is possible to resume the character moving effect with a different effect mode at a higher rate than when the character hiding effect is executed at the second timing. may be

At step AKS046 of the character movement effect executing process shown in FIG. 10-24, the hiding character is one of the characters CH01 to CH04, as in the determination example 002AKD32 shown in FIG. 10-25(B). If the hidden character is one of the characters CH11 to CH14, it is determined to be "resume display" at a high rate. With such a setting, when the character movement effect as the specific effect is started in the first pattern and then the character concealment effect as the special effect is executed in the first concealment display pattern and becomes invisible, The character movement effect can be restarted at a high rate in the first pattern, and after starting the execution of the character movement effect as the specific effect in the second pattern, the character concealment effect as the special effect is performed in the second concealment display pattern. When it is executed and becomes invisible, the character movement effect can be restarted at a low rate and can be finished without restarting the character movement effect at a high rate. In this manner, the character movement effect may be restarted at different rates depending on which of the plurality of effect modes the character hiding effect is.

FIGS. 10-33(E) and 10-33(F) show an effect when a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that changes twice before following the execution of the switching suggestion effect in the effect execution example 002AK113. An execution example is shown. In the effect execution example 002AK115 shown in FIG. 10-33(E), the character movement effect is executed corresponding to the effect pattern in which the character CH01 is displayed without switching, which is the same as before the switching suggestion effect is executed. In an effect execution example 002AK116 shown in FIG. 10-33(F), a character moving effect is executed in accordance with the effect pattern of switching to and displaying the character CH11, which is different from before the switching suggestion effect is executed. In the case of the movement effect type RSA, if any of RPA1-1-1 to RPA1-1-4 shown in FIG. The character movement effect can be executed without switching the display of the character CH01 as in execution example 002AK115. On the other hand, in the case of the moving effect type RSD, any of the effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the display of the character CH01 is switched to the character CH11 as in the effect execution example 002AK116 by executing a switching suggestion effect. Therefore, when the switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the display of the character is not switched, the character movement effect as the specific effect is performed in the effect pattern which is the second pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK115. It can be executed continuously. On the other hand, when a switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK113 is executed and the display of the character is switched, the character movement effect that becomes the specific effect in the effect pattern that is the first pattern as in the effect execution example 002AK116. is executable.

FIG. 10-34 shows an effect execution example in the case where the character movement effect and the like continuing from the effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 10-32 (C2) are executed. FIGS. 10-34(A) and 10-34(B) show the case where the variable display with the 2nd-previous change is executed after the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK103 is completed. Of these, an effect execution example is shown in which the switching suggestion effect and the character hiding effect are not executed. In the effect execution example 002AK121 shown in FIG. 10-34(A), in the variable display that changes two times before, the character A moving effect is being executed. Effect execution example 002AK122 shown in FIG. 10-34(B) corresponds to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH12, which is different from the effect execution example 002AK103, in which the character CH12 is displayed in the variable display that changes two times before, and the character A moving effect is being executed. In addition, it is sufficient that an effect image showing the reachable display position is displayed in a recognizable manner. In the case of the moving effect type RSB, if any of the effect patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. In the variation, it is possible to execute a character movement effect to display the character CH11, which is the same as in the variation three times before. In the case of the moving effect type RSB, if any of the effect patterns RPB1-2-2-2 to RPB1-2-4-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which a character CH12 different from the character CH11 in the third-previous change is displayed in the last-previous change.

In FIG. 10-34(C), following the end of the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. It shows an effect execution example 002AK123 when the switching suggestion effect is executed among the cases where the switching suggestion effect is executed. In this effect execution example 002AK123, a switching suggestion effect is executed by a display image forming the effect display CJ01.

The switching suggestion effect may be executable in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. As in the case of the effect execution example 002AK113 shown in FIG. 10-33(C), it is decided to execute the switching suggestive effect at step AKS051 of the character movement effect executing process shown in FIG. 10-24. In this case, it may be possible to determine one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as an effect pattern to be the pattern for switching suggestion effect. In this case, the effect pattern that is the switching suggestion effect pattern may be determined at a different determination rate corresponding to the effect pattern that is the character movement effect pattern. For example, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSC is the character moving effect pattern, the third suggesting effect pattern that can be determined as the switching suggesting effect pattern at a high decision rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The determination rate may be set so that the switching suggestion rendering pattern can be determined at a low determination rate when is the character movement rendering pattern. In addition, when the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSC is the character moving effect pattern, the fourth suggesting effect pattern that can be determined as the switching suggesting effect pattern at a low decision rate is the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The determination rate may be set so that the switching suggestion rendering pattern can be determined at a high determination rate when is the character movement rendering pattern. With such a setting, when the switching suggestion performance is executed in the fourth suggestion performance pattern, the first pattern is executed more than the case where the switching suggestion performance is executed in the third suggestion performance pattern. The ratio of executing the character movement effect as the started specific effect while maintaining the second pattern without switching to the second pattern increases. In this way, it may be possible to execute the character movement effect without switching from the first pattern to the second pattern at different ratios depending on which one of the plurality of effect modes the switching suggestion effect is.

In FIG. 10-34(D), following the end of the variable display with the 3rd-previous change in the effect execution example 002AK103 shown in FIG. 002AK124 shows an effect execution example 002AK124 when the character hiding effect is executed. In this effect execution example 002AK124, the character hidden display is executed by the effect image forming the hidden display CK01.

The character hidden display may be executed in any one of a plurality of types of presentation modes. As in the case of effect execution example 002AK114 shown in FIG. 10-33(D), it is decided to execute the character hiding effect at step AKS043 of the character movement effect executing process shown in FIG. 10-24. In this case, it may be possible to determine any one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance as the rendering pattern to be the concealing rendering pattern. In this case, the effect pattern that is the pattern for concealing effect may be determined at a different determination rate corresponding to the effect pattern that is the pattern for character movement effect.

FIGS. 10-34(E) and 10-34(F) show the effect when the character movement effect in the variable display that changes twice before is executed following the execution of the switching suggestion effect in the effect execution example 002AK123. An execution example is shown. In the effect execution example 002AK125 shown in FIG. 10-34(E), the character movement effect is executed in accordance with the effect pattern in which the character CH11 is displayed without switching, which is the same as before the switching suggestion effect is executed. In the effect execution example 002AK126 shown in FIG. 10-34(F), the character moving effect is executed in accordance with the effect pattern of switching and displaying the character CH01 different from before the switching suggesting effect is executed. In the case of the moving effect type RSB, if any one of RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-4-4 shown in FIG. Even if this is done, the character movement effect can be executed without switching the display of the character CH11 like the effect execution example 002AK125. On the other hand, in the case of the moving effect type RSC, any of the effect patterns RPC1-1-1 to RPC1-1-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect for switching from the display of the character CH11 to the character CH01 as in the effect execution example 002AK126 by executing the effect. Therefore, when the switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the display of the character is not switched, the character movement effect as the specific effect is performed in the effect pattern which is the first pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK125. It can be executed continuously. On the other hand, when a switching suggestion effect such as the effect execution example 002AK123 is executed and the display of the character is switched, the character movement effect that is the specific effect is obtained in the effect pattern that is the second pattern such as the effect execution example 002AK126. is executable.

FIGS. 10-35 and 10-36 show examples of effect execution by character movement effects and the like corresponding to variable display that is the previous change and target change. FIG. 10-35(A1) shows an effect execution example 002AK131 in which a character moving effect is executed in correspondence with the effect pattern of displaying the character CH01 in the variable display that is the previous change. In the case of the moving effect type RSA, if the effect pattern RPA1-1-1 shown in FIG. 10-15 is used, it is possible to execute the character moving effect of displaying the character CH01 in the previous change as in the effect execution example 002AK131. is. In the case of the movement effect type RSC, if the effect pattern RPC1-1-1 shown in FIG. It is viable. The inheritance determination effect may be executed when the character movement effect is executed in the variable display that is the previous change. In the effect execution example 002AK131, by displaying the character CH101, it is possible to recognize that execution of the inheritance determination effect has started.

FIGS. 10-35 (B1) and 10-35 (C1) show an effect execution example in which, following the display of the character CH101 and the like in the effect execution example 002AK131, the inheritance determination effect progresses in the character movement effect. . In the effect execution example 002AK132 shown in FIG. 10-35(B1), a battle effect is executed between the character CH01, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement effect, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination effect. In effect execution example 002AK133 shown in FIG. 10-35(C1), as the effect result of the battle effect of effect execution example 002AK132, a defeat effect is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH01 has lost the battle. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous change is terminated, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the object change that is the object of determination. In the effect execution example 002AK133, when the defeat effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the player can easily recognize the effect result in the battle effect. It is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. Along with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance determination effect included in the character movement effect, the effect symbol set in advance as the look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping the display in the character movement effect. It is only necessary to raise the degree of attention of the player to the character movement effect and improve the game interest. FIG. 10-35 (D1) shows the case where the variable display that becomes the target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that becomes the variation before the character movement effect such as the performance execution examples 002AK131 to 002AK133 is executed. 002AK134 is shown. When the character movement effect is executed in accordance with one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect types RSA and RSC, the character movement effect is completed in the variable display that changes once before, so that the target After the variable display becomes variable, the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode. In the case of the movement effect type RSA, the character movement effect can be executed in different effect modes corresponding to a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined as the character movement effect pattern. The effect patterns included in the moving effect type RSA are displayed such that any one of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be changed for each variable display. Then, the determination rate of the production pattern may be set so that the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed. For example, when the character CH04 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the big win game state should be higher than when any one of the characters CH01 to CH03 is displayed. In this way, when the character movement effect is executed in the second pattern in which the effect mode is not inherited, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state may differ according to a plurality of types of effect modes.

In addition, in the character movement effect, after the character CH01 is displayed, it can be changed and displayed to any of the characters CH02 to CH04. On the other hand, in the character movement effect, after the character CH02 is displayed, the character CH03 or CH04 can be changed and displayed. is configured. In the character movement effect, after the character CH03 is displayed, it can be changed to the character CH04 and displayed, but the effect pattern is configured so that the display does not change to either of the characters CH01 and CH02. there is In the character movement effect, the effect pattern is configured so that the display of any of the characters CH01 to CH03 does not change after the character CH04 is displayed. In the character movement effect, when the character CH04 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is the highest, when the character CH03 is displayed, the expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is second highest, and the character CH02 is expected. is displayed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is the next highest, and when the character CH01 is displayed, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big win game state is the lowest. It is sufficient if it is set. In this case, after one of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed and the player can recognize the degree of expectation for a big win corresponding to the display, if the display changes to a character with a low degree of expectation for a big win, the display may temporarily change. However, there is a risk that the player's heightened sense of anticipation will decrease and that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, the character movement performance can be executed in a plurality of types of performance modes, and when the expectations of being controlled to the big win game state are different corresponding to the plurality of types of performance modes, the expectations of being controlled to the big win game state. A restriction may be provided so that after the character movement effect is executed in a first effect mode with a high value, the character movement effect is not changed to a second mode with a lower expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state than in the first effect mode. . As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in the player's sense of expectation.

FIG. 10-35 (A2) shows an effect execution example 002AK135 in which a character moving effect is executed corresponding to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH11 in the variable display that is the one-time previous change. In the case of the moving effect type RSB, if any of the effect patterns RPB1-1-1-1 to RPB1-1-1-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH11 is displayed in the variation. Further, in the case of the movement effect type RSD, if any of the effect patterns RPD1-1-1-1 to RPD1-1-1-4 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH11 is displayed in the previous change. In effect execution example 002AK135, similarly to effect execution example 002AK131, by displaying character CH101, it is possible to recognize that execution of inheritance determination effect has started.

FIGS. 10-35 (B2) and 10-35 (C2) show an effect execution example in which, following the display of the character CH101 and the like in the effect execution example 002AK135, the inheritance determination effect progresses in the character movement effect. . In the effect execution example 002AK136 shown in FIG. 10-35 (B2), a battle effect is executed between the character CH11, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement effect, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination effect. In effect execution example 002AK137 shown in FIG. 10-35 (C2), as the effect result of the battle effect of effect execution example 002AK136, a victory effect is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH11 has won the battle. In this case, the character movement effect that has been executed up to the variable display that becomes the previous change continues, and the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited in the variable display that becomes the object change that is the object of determination. In the effect execution example 002AK137, when the winning effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the player can easily recognize the effect result in the battle effect. It is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. Along with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance determination effect included in the character movement effect, the effect symbol set in advance as the look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping the display in the character movement effect. It is only necessary to raise the degree of attention of the player to the character movement effect and improve the game interest. FIG. 10-35 (D2) shows the case where the variable display as the target variation is executed following the end of the variable display as the variation before the character movement effect such as the effect execution examples 002AK135 to 002AK137 is executed. 002AK138 is shown. In the effect execution example 002AK138, the display of the character CH11 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement effect, and the effect is executed by displaying the display image including the character image for notifying the message. When the character movement effect is executed in accordance with one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect types RSB and RSD, the execution of the character movement effect does not end in the variable display that is the previous change. A character movement effect is executed in the first pattern that inherits the effect mode after the variable display that becomes variable.

FIG. 10-36(A1) shows an effect execution example 002AK141 in which a character moving effect is executed corresponding to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH02 in the variable display that is the one-time previous change. In the case of the movement effect type RSA, if the effect pattern is such that the character CH02 is set corresponding to the previous change, such as the effect pattern RPA1-1-2 shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect execution example 002AK141. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH02 is displayed in the first-previous change. In the case of the moving effect type RSC, if the effect pattern is such that the character CH02 is set corresponding to the previous change, such as the effect pattern RPC1-1-2 shown in FIG. 10-17, the effect is executed. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH02 is displayed in the first-previous change such as example 002AK141. In effect execution example 002AK141, similar to effect execution example 002AK121 and the like, character CH101 may be displayed to make it possible to recognize that execution of inheritance determination effect has started.

FIGS. 10-36 (B1) and 10-36 (C1) show an effect execution example in which, following the display of the character CH101 and the like in the effect execution example 002AK141, the inheritance determination effect progresses in the character movement effect. . In the effect execution example 002AK142 shown in FIG. 10-36(B1), a battle effect is executed between the character CH02, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement effect, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination effect. In effect execution example 002AK143 shown in FIG. 10-36(C1), as the effect result of the battle effect of effect execution example 002AK142, a defeat effect is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH02 has lost the battle. In this case, the character movement performance that has been executed up to the variable display that is the previous change is terminated, and the performance mode of the character movement performance is not inherited in the variable display that is the object change that is the object of determination. In the effect execution example 002AK143, when the defeat effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the player can easily recognize the effect result in the battle effect. It is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. Along with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance determination effect included in the character movement effect, the effect symbol set in advance as the look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping the display in the character movement effect. It is only necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the character movement effect and improve the game interest. FIG. 10-36 (D1) shows the case where the variable display that becomes the target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that becomes the variation just before the character movement effect such as the performance execution examples 002AK141 to 002AK143 is executed. 002AK144 is shown. When the character movement effect is executed in accordance with one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect types RSA and RSC, the character movement effect is completed in the variable display that changes once before, so that the target A character movement effect is executed in a second pattern in which the effect mode is not inherited after the variable display becomes variable.

FIG. 10-36(A2) shows an effect execution example 002AK145 in which a character moving effect is executed corresponding to the effect pattern of displaying the character CH12 in the variable display that is the one-time previous change. In the case of the moving effect type RSB, if the effect pattern is such that the character CH12 is set corresponding to the previous change, such as the effect pattern RPB1-1-2-2 shown in FIG. 10-16, effect execution It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH12 is displayed in the first-previous change such as example 002 AK145. Further, in the case of the moving effect type RSD, if the effect pattern is such as the effect pattern RPD1-1-2-2 shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a character movement effect in which the character CH12 is displayed in the previous change as in the effect execution example 002AK145. In effect execution example 002AK145, similarly to effect execution example 002AK141, the display of character CH101 may be used to make it possible to recognize that execution of the inheritance determination effect has started.

FIGS. 10-36 (B2) and 10-36 (C2) show an effect execution example in which, following the display of the character CH101 and the like in the effect execution example 002AK145, the inheritance determination effect progresses in the character movement effect. . In the effect execution example 002AK146 shown in FIG. 10-36 (B2), a battle effect is executed between the character CH12, which has been moved and displayed in the character movement effect, and the character CH101 in the inheritance determination effect. In effect execution example 002AK147 shown in FIG. 10-36(C2), as the effect result of the battle effect of effect execution example 002AK146, a victory effect is executed in which it is possible to recognize that character CH12 has won the battle. In this case, the character movement effect that has been executed up to the variable display that becomes the previous change continues, and the effect mode of the character movement effect is inherited in the variable display that becomes the object change that is the object of determination. In the effect execution example 002AK137, when the winning effect is executed, the variable display of the effect symbols may be temporarily stopped so that the player can easily recognize the effect result in the battle effect. It is sufficient that the variable display of the small symbols can be continuously executed in the small symbol display area AKC0 when the variable display of the performance symbols is temporarily stopped. Along with the notification of the execution result of the inheritance determination effect included in the character movement effect, the effect symbol set in advance as the look-ahead chance is temporarily stopped and displayed overlapping with the display in the character movement effect. It is only necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the character movement effect and improve the game interest. FIG. 10-36 (D2) shows the case where the variable display that becomes the target variation is executed following the end of the variable display that becomes the variation just before the character movement effect such as the performance execution examples 002AK145 to 002AK147 is executed. 002AK148 is shown. In the effect execution example 002AK148, the display of the character CH12 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement effect, and the effect is executed by displaying the display image including the character image for notifying the message. The message notified when the display of the character CH12 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement effect is different from the message notified when the display of the character CH11 reaches the arrival display position in the character movement effect. I wish I had. In this manner, the message may be notified in a different notification mode in accordance with the effect mode when the character movement effect is inherited after the variable display that is the object of determination. When the character movement effect is executed in accordance with one of the effect patterns included in the movement effect types RSB and RSD, the execution of the character movement effect does not end in the variable display that is the previous change. A character movement effect is executed in the first pattern that inherits the effect mode after the variable display that becomes variable.

FIG. 10-37(A) shows a setting example 002AKE01 of the character display rate corresponding to the movement effect types RSA and RSD. In this setting example 002AKE01, when the character movement effect is executed in the variable display that changes three times before, the display rate of each character set in the second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode is set to the movement effect type RSA, Different display ratios correspond to RSD. The 3rd time before variable display character indicates a character that is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the 3rd time before variable display.

In the case of the movement effect type RSA, the effect pattern is determined with a determination rate like the determination example 002AKD13 shown in FIG. 10-19(A). In the case of the movement effect type RSD, the effect pattern is determined at a determination rate like the determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20(B). With such a setting, in the case of the moving effect type RSA, the display rate of the character CH01 corresponding to the three-time-before change is higher than in the case of the moving effect type RSD, both at the time of losing and at the time of the big hit. On the other hand, in the case of the moving effect type RSA, the display ratios of the characters CH02 to CH04 corresponding to the three-time-before change are all lower than in the case of the moving effect type RSD, both at the time of losing and at the time of the big hit. Therefore, in the case where the character movement effect is executed in the variable display that changes three times before, when the character CH01 is displayed, the movement effect type is higher than when any one of the characters CH02 to CH04 is displayed. The percentage of RSA is higher, and the percentage of moving effect type RSD is lower. When the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD, the victory effect is executed after the inheritance determination effect in the variable display that becomes the first change, and the effect is executed after the variable display that becomes the object change. This is the first pattern that inherits the aspect. Then, when the character CH01 is displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, the proportion of the movement effect type RSA increases, and the execution of the character movement effect that is the specific effect in the second pattern is started. After that, the ratio of switching the character movement effect to the first pattern and executing it is low. On the other hand, when any one of the characters CH02 to CH04 is displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, the ratio of the moving effect type RSD increases, and the specific effect is performed in the second pattern. After starting execution of the character movement effect, the ratio of switching the character movement effect to the first pattern and executing it is high. In this way, in response to a plurality of second patterns having different effects such as the character displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, the rate at which the character movement effect that is the specific effect is switched to the first pattern and executed. can be different. Not limited to the characters displayed in the variable display that changes three times before, the character movement effect that is the specific effect is produced in response to a plurality of second patterns having different arbitrary effect modes in the character movement effect that is the specific effect. It suffices if the rate of execution by switching to the first pattern can be made different.

FIG. 10-37(B) shows a setting example 002AKE02 of the character display rate corresponding to the moving effect types RSB and RSD. In this setting example 002 AKE02, when a character movement effect is executed in a variable display that is subject to change, the display rate of each character set in the first pattern that inherits the effect mode is set for each of the movement effect types RSB and RSD. Different display ratios correspond to the 3rd-preceding variable display character that can be displayed at the time. The 3rd time before variable display character is a character that is displayed when the character movement effect is executed in the variable display that is the 3rd time change, and any one of the characters CH11 to CH14 can be displayed in the case of the movement effect type RSB. , and any one of the characters CH01 to CH04 can be displayed in the case of the moving effect type RSD.

In the case of the movement effect type RSB, the effect pattern is determined at a determination rate like the determination example 002AKD14 shown in FIG. 10-19(B). In the case of the movement effect type RSD, the effect pattern is determined at a determination rate like the determination example 002AKD16 shown in FIG. 10-20(B). With such a setting, in the case of the moving effect type RSB, the display rate of the character CH11 corresponding to the target change at the time of losing becomes the highest when the character CH11 corresponds to the change three times before. On the other hand, in the case of the moving effect type RSD, in the case of the character CH01 corresponding to the change three times before, the display rate of the character CH14 corresponding to the target change at the time of losing is the highest. In addition, the display rate of the characters CH11 to CH14, which are the target variable display characters, is as follows. The display rate differs depending on whether the character is one of the characters CH01 to CH04 corresponding to the moving effect type RSD. Therefore, among the cases where the character movement effect is executed in the variable display that changes three times before, the case where one of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSB and the case where any of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed and the movement effect type RSD The ratio of which of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the variable display that becomes the target variation is different from the case where the characters CH01 to CH04 are displayed in the effect pattern included in the . In this way, in the variable display with the three-time-previous change, the execution of the character movement effect, which is the specific effect, is started in the first pattern in which any one of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed, and the three-time-previous change. In the case of switching to the first pattern after starting execution of the character movement effect that is the specific effect in the second pattern in which any one of the characters CH01 to CH04 is displayed in the variable display, display in the variable display that becomes the target change. In which of a plurality of first patterns having different presentation modes, such as the character to be moved, the character movement presentation as the specific presentation is executed can be made different. It is not limited to the character displayed in the variable display that is the 3rd time before change or the target change, and when the execution of the character movement effect that is the specific effect in the first pattern is started, and the specific effect is performed in the second pattern. It is sufficient if the ratio of which of a plurality of first patterns the character movement performance as the specific performance is executed is different between the case of switching to the first pattern after the execution of the character movement performance is started.

The character movement production is performed when the production starts with the production pattern included in the movement production type RSB and when the production execution starts with the production pattern included in the movement production type RSD. Control data or the like in the effect control pattern may be set so that the effect modes are different. For example, when one of the characters CH11 to CH14 is displayed in the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB, the speaker 8L is more likely to display the characters CH01 to CH04 in the effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSD. , 8R, the control data in the effect control pattern may be set so as to increase the volume of the sound output. In addition, display of effect images on the image display device 5, sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members including the movable body 32, or all of these Or you may make the production|presentation mode different using arbitrary production|presentation apparatuses called the combination of a part.

FIG. 10-38 shows an effect execution example when the active display change effect is executed. When the display result in the variable display of the effect execution example 002AK201 shown in FIG. is displayed in green using the display image AKE2. In step AKS006 of the look-ahead effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-11, the effect image to be the pending display image is determined, and in accordance with the determination result, the pending display update setting at the time of start winning is performed in step AKS007. , the hold display using the display image AKE2 can be started in response to the occurrence of the start winning. In effect execution example 002AK202 shown in FIG. 10-38(B), subsequent to effect execution example 002AK201, the pending display is shifted and the active display is updated when a new variable display is started. At this time, it is determined to "with active display change effect" to execute the active display change effect by step AKS102 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27.

Based on the determination result of step AKS102, step AKS104 determines an effect pattern to be an active display change effect pattern. After that, in step AKS107, the effect control pattern corresponding to the active display change effect pattern is determined. Using the effect control pattern determined in this manner, effect control for executing the active display change effect is enabled by step AKS131 of the process during effect symbol variation shown in FIG. 10-31. For example, when the effect pattern YAP2-2 shown in FIG. 10-28(C) is determined as the active display change effect pattern, action effects such as effect execution example 002AK203 shown in FIG. 10-38(C) Execution of the active display change effect including is started. The action effect may be any display effect in which the display of the effect image different from the active display acts on the active display. When the active display change effect is executed in the effect pattern YAP2-2, the display mode of the active display can be changed twice, and the second change is performed after the first change. FIG. 10-38(D) shows an effect in which the display mode of the active display is changed for the first time to notify the message of "chance" using the display image AKE12 following the effect execution example 002AK203. Execution example 002AK204 is shown.

In the effect execution example 002 AK204, the display mode of the active display is changed from the first mode by the display image AKE2 to the second mode by the display image AKE12 which is controlled to the jackpot gaming state with higher expectation than the first mode. After that, the display color of the active display is green as a history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change. Such effect control may be executed using the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the active display change effect pattern. A predetermined suggestive effect period may be set in advance as the execution period of the history suggestive effect. A restriction may be provided so that an action effect or the like for changing the display mode of the active display next is not executed until the suggestive effect period ends. The suggestive effect period may be a period of a certain period of time, or may be a period up to the timing at which the ready-to-win effect of normal ready-to-win is executed when the variable display is in the ready-to-win state. In addition, the suggested effect period may be any period that is set in advance corresponding to the progress of the effect. FIG. 10-38(E) shows an effect execution example 002AK205 when the suggested effect period ends after the effect execution example 002AK204. In this case, the green display of the active display in the history suggesting effect is terminated, and control is performed to the normal white display or the like. The history suggestion effect is not limited to one corresponding to the first mode before the change depending on the display color of the effect image. The first aspect of may be recognizably displayed.

FIG. 10-38(F) shows an effect execution example 002AK206 in the case where the action effect in the active display change effect is executed after the effect execution example 002AK205. FIG. 10-38(G) shows the second change in which the display mode of the active display changes to the display mode of notifying the message of "extreme heat" using the display image AKE13, following the effect execution example 002AK206. A production execution example 002AK207 is shown.

Like the active display change effect, the change effect that changes the display mode of the active display that is the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be changed by executing the effect effect in one of a plurality of types of effect modes, for example. may be implemented in any manner. In this case, even if the same history suggestion effect can be executed in the case where the active display change effect is executed in the first effect mode and the case where the active display change effect is executed in the second effect mode among the plurality of types of effect modes. good. In this way, in the case where it is possible to execute the change effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display, the change effect starts to be executed in any of the plurality of types of effect modes. It is sufficient that the history suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode before the change can be executed after the change.

FIG. 10-39 shows an example of execution control of the active display change effect shown in FIG. 10-38. In this execution control example, the previous variable display such as the effect execution example 002AK201 shown in FIG. It is in a terminated state. Then, in response to the start of the variable display at timing T01, the active display in the active display area AKA0 is updated as in the effect execution example 002AK202 shown in FIG. As a display, a green display using the display image AKE2 is performed. After that, the execution of the active display change effect is started at timing T02, and during the period up to time T03, as the action effect corresponding to the first change, the effect execution example 002AK203 shown in FIG. A dramatic effect image is displayed. When the action effect corresponding to the first change ends at timing T03, the display mode of the active display changes, and the execution of the history suggestion effect is started. As a result, in the period up to timing T04, a history suggestive effect such as effect execution example 002AK204 shown in FIG. 10-38(D) is executed.

When the history suggestion effect ends at timing T04, the display color is set to white, which is the normal display, etc., as the display mode of the active display. An active display such as is performed. Further, at timing T05, an action effect corresponding to the second change in the active display change effect is started, and during the period up to time T06, a effect image such as effect execution example 002AK206 shown in FIG. 10-38(F) is displayed. is displayed. When the action effect corresponding to the second change ends at timing T06, the display mode of the active display changes. As a result, after timing T06, an active display such as effect execution example 002AK207 shown in FIG. 10-38(G) becomes possible.

In this way, when the active display change effect is executed, the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display is changed from the first mode to the second mode in which the expectation of a big win is higher than that of the first mode. It is possible to execute a change production that changes to . Further, when the display mode of the active display is changed by the active display change performance, the history suggestion performance corresponding to the first mode before the change can be executed after the active display change performance is started. As a result, when the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding display, changes, the display mode before the change can be recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is not limited to the display mode of the active display, and when the performance mode changes from the first mode in an arbitrary performance to a second mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the first mode, the performance execution is started. After that, any history suggesting effect corresponding to the first mode before the change can be executed. In this way, it is sufficient if the amusement of the game can be improved by making the performance mode before the change recognizable. When a specific performance including a character movement performance is executed, after starting execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, a history suggestive performance is provided corresponding to switching to the first pattern and executing the specific performance. , after the specific effect switched to the first pattern is started, the effect mode corresponding to the second pattern before switching may be recognized. All or part of the change effect and the history suggesting effect include the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of the sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movement of the movable body 32. It is sufficient if it can be executed using any production device, such as the movement of the movable members included, or a combination of all or part of these.

FIG. 10-40 shows an effect execution example when a ready-to-win effect for super reach is executed. At step AKS107 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern is determined. Using the effect control pattern determined by step AKS107, step AKS133 of the process during effect pattern fluctuation shown in FIG. FIG. 10-40(A) shows an effect execution example 002AK301 corresponding to the start of the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win. In this case, on the screen of the image display device 5, a character CH201 to be an ally character and a character CH202 to be an enemy character are displayed. Also, a blue background is displayed in the display area around the character CH201 as the corresponding display color for the character CH201, and a red background is displayed in the display area around the character CH202 as the corresponding display color for the character CH202. In addition, an effect image or the like is displayed to notify that there is a battle chance for the character CH201, which is an ally character, and the character CH202, which is an enemy character, to battle each other. In this battle chance, when the character CH201, which is an ally character, wins the battle with the character CH202, which is an enemy character, it is notified that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state. The ready-to-win effect including the display of the character CH201 serving as an ally character and the display of the character CH202 serving as an enemy character is included in the suggestive effect suggesting that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state.

FIG. 10-40(B) shows an effect execution example 002AK302 in the case of introducing a character CH201 to be an ally character following the effect execution example 002AK301. At this time, an effect by displaying the character CH201 is executed as the first character display effect included in the first effect. Also, as the first character introduction effect included in the first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect, an effect by displaying a message introducing the character CH201 is executed in the display area displayed in blue. This makes it possible to execute the first effect and the first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect.

FIG. 10-40(C) shows an effect execution example 002AK303 in which the character CH201, which is a friend character, is being displayed after the effect execution example 002AK302. In this case, the effect by displaying the character CH201 continues as the first character display effect included in the first effect. On the other hand, the first character introduction effect included in the first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect is finished, and the second character introduction effect included in the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect is displayed in red. An effect is executed by displaying a message for introducing the character CH202 in the display area. As a result, the execution of the second corresponding effect can be started during the execution of the first effect before switching from the first effect to the second effect.

FIG. 10-40(D) shows an effect execution example 002AK304 in which the character CH202, which is the enemy character, is displayed after the effect execution example 002AK303. At this time, an effect by displaying the character CH202 is executed as a second character display effect included in the second effect. Also, as the second character introduction effect included in the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect, an effect by displaying a message introducing the character CH202 is executed in the display area displayed in red. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the second effect obtained by switching the first effect and the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect. It should be noted that the case where the execution of the second corresponding effect is started during the execution of the first effect as in the effect execution example 002AK303, and the case where the second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect is executed as in the effect execution example 002AK304. Also, part of the effect mode in the second corresponding effect may be different. For example, in the effect execution example 002AK303 and the effect execution example 002AK304, while the display area where the effect by displaying the message is displayed in red is common, the size, shape, pattern, and addition to the display area of the display area The presence or absence of effect display, the size, shape, pattern, color, and other display modes of arbitrary effect images may be different display modes. Further, when a message is displayed by the character CH202 uttering a line, even if the line of the character CH202 cannot be reported in the effect execution example 002AK303 and the line of the character CH202 can be reported in the effect execution example 002AK304. good.

In this way, when the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win is executed, as the suggestive effect in the ready-to-win effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state, the first character display effect to be the first effect, and the first effect. and a second character display effect, which is a second effect switched after the execution of . Also, it is possible to execute a first character introduction effect, which is a first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect, and a second character introduction effect, which is a second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect. Then, before switching from the first character display effect to the second character display effect, execution of the second character introduction effect can be started during execution of the first character display effect. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize the switching and relationship of the effects, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After the character CH202, which is the enemy character, is displayed as in the effect execution example 002AK304, a third effect in which neither the character CH201 nor the character CH202 is displayed may be executed. When such a third effect is executed, the third corresponding effect may be executed in a different effect mode from the effect mode of the first corresponding effect and the effect mode of the second corresponding effect. The effect may not be executed and only the third effect may be executed. The third effect may be, for example, a flash display effect in which the display screen of the image display device 5 flashes, or a rainbow lighting effect in which light-emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are lit in rainbow colors. may In addition, all or part of the third effect includes the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 and the light-emitting members such as the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. As long as it can be executed using any production device, such as the movement of the movable member, or a combination of all or part of these

After the character CH202, which is the enemy character, is displayed as in the effect execution example 002AK304, an after-introduction effect may be executed in which both the character CH201 and the character CH202 are displayed. When such an after-introduction effect is executed, it may be possible to execute the corresponding effect in an effect mode common to either the effect mode of the first corresponding effect or the effect mode of the second corresponding effect. Which production mode to execute the corresponding production may be determined to be a different production form corresponding to the progress control of the production, such as the production content of the ready-to-win production to be the subsequent super ready-to-win. For example, when the character CH201 goes first, the corresponding effect corresponding to the post-introduction effect may be executed in the effect mode of the first corresponding effect.

When the first character display effect included in the first effect such as the effect execution example 002AK302 is executed and the first character introduction effect included in the first corresponding effect is executed, the recognition is higher than that of the first corresponding effect. It may be possible to execute the second corresponding effect in a difficult effect mode. When the second character display effect included in the second effect such as effect execution example 002AK304 is executed and the second character introduction effect included in the second corresponding effect is executed, the recognition is higher than that of the second corresponding effect. It may be possible to execute the first corresponding effect in a difficult effect mode. The first corresponding effect and the second corresponding effect can be achieved by changing the size, transmittance, clarity, color tone of the effect image, volume of sound output, amount of light emitted by the light-emitting member, color of light emitted, and other optional effects. It is sufficient if it can be executed in a performance mode that is difficult to recognize.

It is not limited to the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win, and when the second effect to be switched after the execution of the first effect can be executed, before switching from the first effect to the second effect, the second effect is performed during the execution of the first effect. It may be possible to start execution of the 2-correspondence production. When a specific effect including a character movement effect is executed, after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect is executed by switching to the first pattern, but the second pattern is executed. and a first corresponding effect corresponding to the specific effect executed in the first pattern. In this case, after starting execution of the specific performance in the second pattern, before switching to the first pattern and executing the specific performance, the first corresponding performance is executed during execution of the specific performance in the second pattern. It may be startable. The first effect, the first corresponding effect, the second effect, and the second corresponding effect are all or part of the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, the output of the sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the effect for decoration. It is sufficient if it can be executed using an arbitrary production device such as lighting of a light emitting member such as an LED, operation of a movable member including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these.

FIG. 10-41 shows an effect execution example in the case of transparently displaying the effect pattern accompanying the after-reach effect. The after-reach effect can be executed when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state based on the determination result of step AKS106 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27. However, when only the ready-to-win effect of normal reach is executed and the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is not executed, the after-reach effect may not be executed. Alternatively, when only the ready-to-reach production of normal reach is executed and the ready-to-reach production of super reach is not executed, the post-reach production can be executed at a lower rate than when the ready-to-reach production of super reach is executed. good too.

FIGS. 10-41(A1) to 10-41(C1) show an effect execution example when the background display effect is executed as the post-reach effect. Effect execution example 002AK401 shown in FIG. 10-41(A1) displays the effect image through the background display effect using the display image AKF1. Effect execution example 002AK402 shown in FIG. 10-41(B1) displays the effect image in a transparent manner in accordance with the background display effect using the display image AKF2. In the effect execution example 002AK403 shown in FIG. 10-41(C1), the effect image is transparently displayed with the background display effect using the display image AKF3. In these cases, the effect pattern can be displayed with a certain transmittance, which is the first transmittance, during a specific period from the start to the end of the background display effect, which is the post-reach effect.

FIGS. 10-41(A2) to 10-41(D2) show an effect execution example when a step-up effect is executed as the after-reach effect. In the effect execution example 002AK411 shown in FIG. 10-41(A2), the display image AKG1 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "1" in the first step in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK412 shown in FIG. 10-41(B2), a display image AKG2 is displayed corresponding to the step number "2" of the second step in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK413 shown in FIG. 10-41(C2), a display image AKG3 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "3" in the third step in the step-up effect. In the effect execution example 002AK414 shown in FIG. 10-41(D2), a display image AKG4 is displayed corresponding to the number of steps "4" in the fourth step in the step-up effect. In these cases, the production pattern is a second transmittance that is lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period in the specific period from the start to the end of the step-up effect that is the post-reach production. It can be displayed, and can be displayed with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the end of the specific period.

FIG. 10-42 shows an example of execution control of an effect in which the effect pattern is transparently displayed with the after-reach effect. At step AKS107 of the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 10-27, the effect control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the after-reach effect is determined. Using the effect control pattern determined by step AKS107, the step AKS133 of the effect symbol change process shown in FIG. Become. FIG. 10-42(A) shows an effect execution period during which the after-reach effect can be executed. In this case, the variable display in which the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win is executed starts to fluctuate at timing T11. After that, when the variable display becomes the ready-to-win state at timing T12, execution of the after-ready-to-win effect is started corresponding to establishment of the ready-to-win state, and the after-to-reach effect can be executed in a specific period up to timing T13. When the post-ready-to-win effect ends at timing T13, the advanced effect is executed, and the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win can be executed during the period up to timing T14.

In a period from timing T12 to timing T13 when performance after reach is executable, the performance pattern is made transparent according to the transition pattern and can be displayed. When the after-reach production is determined by step AKS106 of the production pattern variation start processing shown in FIG. It is possible to determine a design transmission pattern corresponding to . Corresponding to the symbol transmission pattern determined by step AKS106, it is sufficient if the symbol transmission control for transmitting the effect symbol can be executed by step AKS133 of the effect symbol change process shown in FIG. 10-31.

FIG. 10-42(B) shows a setting example of the design transmittance corresponding to the design transmittance patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in the determination example 002AKD62 shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When the post-reach effect is the background display effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP1 is determined. The pattern transmission pattern TSP1 can be displayed by transmitting the production pattern with a constant transmittance that is the first transmittance from timing T12, which is the start timing of the after-reach production, to timing T13, which is the end timing of the after-reach production. do. In this way, when any one of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 corresponding to the background display effect is displayed in the after-reach effect, the constant transmittance that is the first transmittance in the specific period from the timing T12 to the timing T13. It is possible to transmit and display the production pattern in the pattern transmission pattern TSP1, which is a transition pattern in which the is maintained.

When the post-reach effect is the step-up effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP2 is determined. The pattern transmission pattern TSP2 can be displayed by transmitting the production pattern with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display effect at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach effect. be. After that, the design transmission pattern TSP2 changes so that the performance design transmittance increases step by step. For example, at each timing when the display images AKG1 to AKG4 change corresponding to the number of steps "1" to "4" in the step-up effect, the transmittance of the effect pattern changes stepwise. good. Then, the pattern transmission pattern TSP2 is displayed by transmitting the production pattern with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display effect at the timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach effect. It is possible. In this way, when the display of the display images AKG1 to AKG4 corresponding to the step-up effect can be changed in the post-reach effect, during the specific period from the timing T12 to the timing T13, the effect pattern corresponding to the start of the specific period is displayed. can be displayed with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, and the effect pattern can be displayed with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period; and It is possible to transmit and display the production pattern in the pattern transmission pattern TSP2.

When the post-reach effect is the story effect, the symbol transmission pattern TSP3 is determined. The pattern transmission pattern TSP3 can be displayed by transmitting the production pattern with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display effect at timing T12, which is the start timing of the post-reach effect. be. After that, the design transmission pattern TSP3 changes so that the performance design transmittance increases in a curvilinear manner. For example, as a series of story progresses from the display of the display image AKH11 to the display of any of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 in the story production, the transmittance of the production pattern changes in a curved line. do it. Then, the pattern transmission pattern TSP3 is displayed by transmitting the performance pattern with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the background display effect at timing T13, which is the end timing of the post-reach effect. It is possible. In this way, when it is possible to change from the display of the display image AKH11 corresponding to the story effect to the display of any of the display images AKH41 to AKH44 in the post-reach effect, during the specific period from the timing T12 to the timing T13, can be displayed with a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specified period, and a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance can be displayed in response to the end of the specific period. The effect pattern can be displayed by being transparent with the pattern transmission pattern TSP3, which is a transition pattern that can be displayed at a rate. The second transmittance corresponding to the story effect may be different from the second transmittance corresponding to the step-up effect, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-42(B), all the second transmittances are 0% in common at timing T12. The third transmittance corresponding to the story effect may be a different transmittance from the third transmittance corresponding to the step-up effect, or may be a common transmittance. In the setting example shown in FIG. 10-42(B), the third transmittance corresponding to the step-up effect is 80% at timing T13, and the third transmittance corresponding to the story effect is set at timing T13. are 100%, resulting in different transmittances.

The post-reach effect is determined at different determination rates, such as the determination example 002AKD61 shown in FIG. be. When the story production is executed as the post-reach production, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the background display production and the step-up production are executed. In addition, when the step-up performance is executed as the post-ready performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is higher than when the background display performance is executed. . Therefore, when the after-reach performance is the background display performance, the performance pattern can be transparently displayed in accordance with the pattern transmission pattern TSP1, and any one of the display images AKF1 to AKF3 is displayed to bring about a jackpot game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation controlled by When the after-reach performance is the step-up performance, the performance pattern can be transparently displayed in accordance with the pattern transmission pattern TSP2, and the display images AKG1 to AKG4 are displayed in a changeable manner, thereby controlling the jackpot game state. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be made. When the after-reach production is the story production, the production pattern can be transparently displayed according to the pattern transmission pattern TSP3, and any one of the display images AKH11 to AKH41 to AKH44 can be displayed in a changeable manner. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In this way, the design transmission pattern used as the transition pattern is the design transmission pattern TSP1 as the first transition pattern, and the design transmission pattern TSP2 or TSP3 as the second transition pattern. The type of the display image that becomes the special image to be displayed is different. As a result, the after-reach performance included in the ready-to-win performance as a special performance is appropriately executed so as to increase the degree of attention to the display of the performance pattern as the transmitted identification information, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, the pattern transmission pattern TSP2 corresponding to the step-up production as the after-reach production is used rather than the case in which the production pattern is transparently displayed according to the pattern transmission pattern TSP1 corresponding to the background display production as the production after the reach. In the case where the production pattern is transparently displayed accordingly, or in the case where the production pattern is transparently displayed according to the pattern transmission pattern TSP3 corresponding to the case where the production after reach is the story production, it is controlled to the big hit game state. higher expectations. The pattern transmission pattern TSP1 makes it possible to display the performance pattern with the first transmittance from the start to the end of the specific period as the first special effect corresponding to the background display effect. The pattern transmission pattern TSP2 can display the performance pattern at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period as a second special effect corresponding to the step-up effect, and the end of the specific period. The performance pattern can be displayed with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance corresponding to the. As a second special effect corresponding to the story effect, the pattern transmission pattern TSP3 can display the effect pattern at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance at the start of the specific period, and at the end of the specific period. Correspondingly, the performance pattern can be displayed with a third transmittance higher than the first transmittance. As a result, the first special effect and the second special effect with different transmittance settings can be appropriately executed to improve the game interest.

The pattern transmission pattern that allows the performance symbol to be transparently displayed may be determined at different ratios corresponding to the performance mode of the advance notice performance executed before the post-reach performance, for example. For example, when the post-reach performance is background display performance, any of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 can be determined at a predetermined ratio, and the advance notice performance executed before the post-reach performance is a performance with a low degree of expectation for a big hit. In this case, the determination rate of the design transmission pattern TSP1 may be set to be higher than the determination rate of the design transmission patterns TSP2 and TSP3. On the other hand, when the advance notice performance executed before the performance after ready-to-win is a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for big win, the decision rate of the symbol transmission pattern TSP3 is higher than the decision rates of the symbol transmission patterns TSP1 and TSP2. may be set to be In this way, the transition pattern in the case of transparently displaying the production pattern serving as the identification information corresponds to the production mode of the advance notice production executed before the post-reach production included in the ready-to-win production as the special production. The ratio of the first transition pattern to the second transition pattern may be different.

When the performance pattern is transmitted through the pattern transmission pattern TSP1 corresponding to the case where the performance after reach is the background display performance, a special image is displayed while the performance pattern is transparently displayed in this pattern transmission pattern TSP1. By doing so, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit game state may be higher than in the case of transparently displaying the production pattern according to either one of the pattern transmission patterns TSP2 and TSP3. For example, it may be confirmed that the game is controlled to the big win game state by executing a chance-up effect using a hit confirmation image while the effect symbol is transparently displayed in the symbol transmission pattern TSP1. In addition, while the effect pattern is transparently displayed in the pattern transmission pattern TSP1, the effect image is transmitted through either the pattern transmission pattern TSP2 or TSP3 by executing the transmission change effect using the change notification image. It may be possible to change to an effect that can be displayed by pressing.

When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during the execution of the after-reach performance included in the ready-to-win performance as a special performance, and then the power supply is restarted, any one of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 is used. Even if the effect pattern is transparently displayed, it may be possible to execute a common restoration time effect using, for example, a recovery display image.

When any of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 is used to transmit and display the production pattern, the type, size, shape, pattern, color, and other arbitrary display modes of the production pattern can be changed. should be controlled by The effect mode of the effect pattern may be set by the control data included in the effect control pattern.

When the time saving condition based on the number of execution times of the variable display is satisfied, the game state can be controlled to the time saving state, and the case where the relief time saving is controlled and the case where it is not controlled become the identification information. The decision rates of the symbol transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3, which are transition patterns that can be displayed through the effect symbols, may be set differently. For example, when the after-reach production is a background display production, it is possible to determine any of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 at a predetermined ratio, and when it is controlled to reduce the relief time, than when it is not controlled to reduce the relief time. Also, it may be possible to transparently display the production pattern in the pattern transmission pattern TSP3 at a high rate.

When a time-saving condition based on the number of execution times of variable display is satisfied, the game state can be controlled to the time-saving state, and corresponding to the variable display in which the time-saving condition is satisfied, any one of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 as a transition pattern. A restriction may be provided so that the symbol transparency control for transparently displaying the performance symbols is not executed. In this way, in the range where the variable display is executed in which the time saving condition for controlling the relief time saving is established, the effect pattern is transparently displayed in any of the pattern transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 that are the transition patterns. A limit may be provided as a limit to which control is not exercised.

FIGS. 10-43 to 10-45 show an effect execution example when the timer standby effect and timer effect are executed. Among them, FIG. 10-43 shows an effect execution example when the effect pattern TPA1 is determined as the timer effect pattern and the effect pattern TPB0 is determined as the standby effect pattern based on the start winning. . The timer standby effect can be executed when a starting prize is generated based on the determination result of step AKS032 of the timer effect determination process shown in FIGS. 10-21. When it is determined in step AKS032 of the timer effect determination process that "there is a timer effect" for executing the timer effect, the effect pattern to be the timer effect pattern is determined in step AKS034, and the effect to be the standby effect pattern is determined in step AKS035. A pattern is determined. Subsequently, execution of the timer standby effect is started by the timer standby effect start setting of step AKS036.

In FIG. 10-43(A), when a start winning occurs during execution of the variable display of the effect pattern and the number of pending memories becomes "3", the effect pattern TPA1 is set for the timer effect by the timer effect determination process. It shows an effect execution example 002AK601 when the pattern is determined and the effect pattern TPB0 is determined to be the standby effect pattern. At this time, a display image AKJ1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning, thereby suggesting that the execution of the timer performance is waiting. In this way, the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0 determined as the standby effect pattern before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed.

FIG. 10-43(B) shows an effect execution example 002AK602 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK601. FIG. 10-43(C) shows an effect execution example 002AK603 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK602. These variable displays are performed before the variable display for which the timer effect is performed, and in response to these variable displays, the continuous effect mode timer standby effect is performed in the effect pattern TPB0. In this case, the timer standby effect is executed in an effect mode in which the specific display does not change.

FIG. 10-43(D) shows an effect execution example 002AK604 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK603. When this variable display is started, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to inform a message of "five seconds left".

In FIG. 10-44, one of the effect patterns TPA1 and TPA3 is determined as the timer effect pattern, and one of the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 is determined as the standby effect pattern based on the occurrence of the start winning. It shows an example of effect execution when it is done. FIG. 10-44(A) shows an effect execution example 002AK611 when a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is started in common to the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. By displaying the display image AKJ0 on the screen of the image display device 5 when starting the execution of the timer standby effect even if any of the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 is determined as the standby effect pattern. , suggesting that execution of the timer effect is waiting. After that, the timer standby effect is executed in a changing effect mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes corresponding to the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2.

FIGS. 10-44 (B1) and 10-44 (C1) show an effect execution example when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. Of these, FIG. 10-44 (B1) shows an effect execution example 002AK612 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the first change mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. In this case, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to the specific display using the display image AKJ1. FIG. 10-44(C1) shows an effect execution example 002AK613 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK612. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the first change mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1. Here, as in the previous variable display, a specific display using the display image AKJ1 is performed.

FIG. 10-44 (D1) shows an effect execution example 002AK614 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK613. When this variable display is started, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to inform a message of "five seconds left".

FIG. 10-44 (B2) and FIG. 10-44 (C2) show an effect execution example when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. Of these, FIG. 10-44 (B2) shows an effect execution example 002AK615 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK611. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the second change mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. In this case, the specific display using the display image AKJ0 changes to the specific display using the display image AKJ2. FIG. 10-44 (C2) shows an effect execution example 002AK616 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK615. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the timer standby effect of the second change mode is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. Here, as in the previous variable display, a specific display using the display image AKJ2 is performed.

FIG. 10-44 (D2) shows an effect execution example 002AK617 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK616. When this variable display is started, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ23 to notify the message of "15 seconds left".

In FIG. 10-45, one of the effect patterns TPA2 and TPA4 is determined as the timer effect pattern, and one of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 is determined as the standby effect pattern, based on the occurrence of the starting prize. It shows an example of effect execution when it is done. FIG. 10-45(A) shows an effect execution example 002AK621 when a specific display corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning is started in common with the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2. By displaying the display image AKJ0 on the screen of the image display device 5 when starting the execution of the timer standby effect even if any of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 is determined as the standby effect pattern. , suggesting that execution of the timer effect is waiting. After that, corresponding to the production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, a timer standby production is executed in a continuous production mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and is separate from the specific production using the display image AKJ0. , the pre-stage effect is executed. FIG. 10-45(B) shows an effect execution example 002AK622 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK621. This variable display is executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed. executed. In this case, the timer standby effect is executed in an effect mode in which the specific display does not change.

FIG. 10-45(C1) shows an effect execution example 002AK623 after a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the continuous effect mode timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1. Here, as in the previous variable display, specific display using the display image AKJ0 is performed. In this case, the pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ11 is executed together with the timer standby effect by the specific display using the display image AKJ0. The pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ11 may be executed before the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK623. It is sufficient if it can be executed correspondingly. FIG. 10-45 (D1) shows an effect execution example 002AK624 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK623. When this variable display is started, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ22 to notify a message of "10 seconds left".

FIG. 10-45(C2) shows an effect execution example 002AK625 after a new variable display is executed following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK622. This variable display is also executed before the variable display in which the timer effect is executed, and corresponding to this variable display, the continuous effect mode timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2. Here, as in the previous variable display, specific display using the display image AKJ0 is performed. In this case, the pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ12 is executed together with the timer standby effect by the specific display using the display image AKJ0. The pre-stage effect using the display image AKJ12 may be executed before the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK623. It is sufficient if it can be executed corresponding to any one of these timings. FIG. 10-45 (D2) shows an effect execution example 002AK626 when a new variable display is started following the end of the variable display in the effect execution example 002AK625. When this variable display is started, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4 determined as the timer effect pattern. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ24 to inform the message of "20 seconds left".

FIG. 10-46 shows an example of execution control of the timer standby effect and timer effect. In this execution control example, execution of the timer standby effect is started based on the occurrence of the start winning. After that, through the start of the variable display corresponding to the two shift timings, until the variable display for the target variation is started, control is performed so that the timer standby effect can be executed in the continuous effect mode or the change effect mode. do. Execution of the timer effect is started in response to the start of the variable display as the target change. The timer effect has different executable periods corresponding to the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4 that can be determined as patterns for timer effect. For example, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA1, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ21 to notify the message "Five seconds left", and the timer effect can be executed during the five-second executable period. If it is In addition, when the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA2, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ22 to notify the message "10 seconds left", and the timer effect can be executed during the 10-second executable period. If it is When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ23 to notify the message "15 seconds left", and the timer effect can be executed during the 15-second executable period. Just do it. When the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA4, a specific display is performed using the display image AKJ24 to notify the message "20 seconds left", and the timer effect can be executed during the 20-second executable period. Just do it. In this manner, the timer effect is set such that the period of the specific display in which a message is notified using any one of the display images AKJ21 to AKJ24 corresponding to the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA4 is short or long. If there is a case, it is good. Note that the specific display is not limited to notifying a message using a display image, and may be capable of displaying an arbitrary effect image.

In the determination example 002AKD22 of the effect pattern that becomes the timer effect pattern shown in FIG. Also, for example, either one of the effect patterns TPA3 and TPA4, the ratio of determining the effect pattern having a long period during which the timer effect can be executed increases. Thereby, in the timer performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big winning game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a long period than when the specific display is displayed for a short period. In addition, in the determination example 002AKD21 regarding the presence or absence of the timer effect shown in FIG. When the number is large, the decision rate of "with timer effect" to execute the timer effect increases. Thus, in the timer standby performance, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the specific display is displayed for a longer period than when the specific display is displayed for a short period.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern shown in FIG. When the pattern for timer effect is the pattern for effect pattern TPA2, the pattern for standby effect is determined at a low rate. On the other hand, the effect pattern TPB1-1 is determined as the standby effect pattern at a higher rate when the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA2 than when the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA1. be. Further, the performance patterns TPB1-2 are determined to be the standby performance pattern at a high rate when the timer performance pattern is the performance pattern TPA3, and are determined to be the standby performance pattern when the timer performance pattern is other than the performance pattern TPA3. Not determined. As a result, the ratio of executing the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA2 is higher in the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-1 than in the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. It becomes higher, and the ratio of executing the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA1 becomes lower. The timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-3 with a longer executable time when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2 than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0. become viable. The effect pattern TPB0 is a effect pattern capable of executing a timer standby effect in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change. The effect pattern TPB1-1 is a effect pattern capable of executing a timer standby effect in a changing display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is changed to the first changing display using the display image AKJ1. The effect pattern TPB1-2 is a effect pattern capable of executing a timer standby effect in a changing display mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 is changed to the second changing display using the display image AKJ2. Based on such setting, the case where the timer standby effect is executed as the changing effect in the changing effect mode in which the specific display changes is more than the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. , the period during which the timer effect can be executed is longer, and the specific display can be displayed for a longer period in the timer effect.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern shown in FIG. When the pattern for timer effect is TPA1, the pattern for standby effect is determined at a rate lower than that of effect pattern TPB1-1. Also, the effect pattern TPB2-1 can be determined as the standby effect pattern at a predetermined ratio even when the timer effect pattern is either the effect pattern TPA3 or TPA4. When the timer effect pattern is the effect pattern TPA4, the effect pattern TPB2-2 is determined as the standby effect pattern at a higher rate than the other effect patterns, and when the timer effect pattern is other than the effect pattern TPA4. is not determined as the standby effect pattern. As a result, any one of the production patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is more likely to execute the timer standby production in the production pattern TPB2-1 than in the case where the timer standby production is executed in the production pattern TPB1-1. The ratio of executing the timer effect increases, and the ratio of executing the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA1 decreases. An effect with a longer executable time when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2 than when the timer standby effect is executed in any of the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. A timer effect can be executed in patterns TPB1-4. The effect pattern TPB2-1 executes a timer standby effect in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can execute a pre-stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ11 separately from the specific display. It is a production pattern. The effect pattern TPB2-2 executes a timer standby effect in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display using the display image AKJ0 does not change, and can execute a pre-stage effect by displaying the display image AKJ12 separately from the specific display. It is a production pattern. Note that the pre-stage effect is not limited to displaying any of the display images AKJ11 and AKJ12, and can be any effect image displayed on the image display device 5, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9, and so on. Lighting of light-emitting members such as decorative LEDs, movement of movable members including the movable body 32, or a combination of all or part of these can be executed using any production device.

Based on such setting, even if the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change and the change effect is not executed, the specific display changes when the pre-stage effect is executed. The executable period of the timer effect is longer than when the timer standby effect is executed as the changing effect in the effect mode, and the specific display can be displayed for a long period in the timer effect. Therefore, the timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode in which the specific display changes, and the change effect is executed, rather than the case where the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change and the change effect is not executed. In this case, the executable time of the timer effect is longer in the variable display as the target variation, so that the specific display can be displayed for a longer period after the variable display as the target variation. On the other hand, even if the timer standby performance is executed in the continuous performance mode in which the specific display does not change and the change performance is not executed, when the pre-stage performance is executed, the specific display changes in the change performance mode. By making the timer effect executable time longer in the variable display that becomes the target variation than when the timer standby effect is executed and the change effect is executed, the specific display is performed in a long period after the variable display that becomes the target variation. Displayable. In this way, even if the specific display does not change before the variable display as the target variation, the specific display is performed before the variable display as the target variation in accordance with whether or not the pre-stage effect is executed. As compared with the case where is changed, whether or not the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target change is set differently. When the specific display is displayed for a long period of time, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when it is displayed for a short period of time. As a result, when the pre-stage effect is executed even if the specific display does not change before the variable display that becomes the target variation, the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target variation. Amusement in a game can be improved by appropriately executing a change performance and a pre-stage performance so as to increase attention to a display.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern shown in FIG. When the timer standby effect is executed, the ratio of executing the timer effect in any of the effect patterns TPA2 to TPA4 is higher, and the ratio of executing the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA1 is lower. On the other hand, the timer effect is executed in the effect pattern TPA3 when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2 rather than when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1. more likely to do so. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2, the timer effect can be executed in the effect pattern TPA4, which is not the case when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2. become. The performance patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 enable the pre-stage performance to be executed in different performance modes. Therefore, when the pre-stage effect can be executed in any of a plurality of types of effect modes, the timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode in response to the effect mode of the pre-stage effect. The rate at which the timer effect is executed in the executable period can be made different. When an arbitrary pre-stage effect can be executed in one of a plurality of types of effect modes without being limited to the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, a specific display is displayed corresponding to the effect mode of the pre-stage effect. It is sufficient that the ratio of displaying the specific display for a long period after the variable display that becomes the target change is different from that in the case where the changing effect that changes is executed.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern shown in FIG. The ratio of executing the timer effect in the effect pattern TPA4 is higher when the timer standby effect is executed. Also, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-1, the timer effect can be executed in any one of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. On the other hand, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB2-2, the timer effect is not executed in any of the effect patterns TPA1 to TPA3. Therefore, when the pre-stage effect can be executed in any one of a plurality of types of effect modes, the specific display can be displayed in the timer effect after the variable display that becomes the subject change, corresponding to the effect mode of the pre-stage effect. The average duration of the periods can be different. Not limited to the production patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2, and when arbitrary pre-stage production can be executed in one of a plurality of types of production modes, subject change and It is sufficient if the expected value of the period during which the specific display can be displayed after the other variable display is different.

For example, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, a changing display in which the specific display changes in the timer effect may be made executable. In this way, when the timer standby effect is executed in the continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change, and the change effect is not executed, the effect mode of the timer effect changes in the variable display that becomes the target change, so that the target change is achieved. It may also be possible to execute a change effect in which the specific display changes after a certain variable display.

In the determination example 002AKD23 of the effect pattern to be the standby effect pattern shown in FIG. When the timer standby performance is executed, the timer performance can be executed in the performance pattern TPA3. When the timer standby performance is executed in the performance pattern TPB1-1, the timer performance can be executed in one of the performance patterns TPA1 and TPA2, but the timer performance cannot be executed in the performance pattern TPA3. When the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB1-2, the timer effect is not executed in either of the effect patterns TPA1 and TPA2. Therefore, when the timer standby effect is executed in the change effect mode in which the specific display changes and the change effect is executed, the timer effect after the variable display that becomes the target change corresponds to the change effect mode of the timer standby effect. , the average time length of the period in which the specific display can be displayed can be made different. Not limited to production patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2, and when arbitrary change production can be executed in one of a plurality of types of production modes, a variable that becomes an object change corresponding to the production mode of the change production It is sufficient if the expected value of the period during which the specific display can be displayed after the display is different.

For example, when the timer standby effect is executed in the effect pattern TPB0, the timer standby effect is executed in a continuous effect mode in which the specific display does not change. In this case, the pre-stage effect may be made executable in the timer effect or the variable display of the target change. The specific display in the timer effect may be deleted in response to the execution of such a pre-stage effect. For example, in the final stage of the ready-to-win effect that becomes super ready-to-win, when the final notification effect to notify whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state is executed, control to erase the specific display may be performed.

Before the variable display that is the object of judgment and after the variable display that is the object of judgment, the specific timing is not limited to the one that can be executed, and is set according to the progress of any production. It may be possible to execute a specific effect or the like before and after a specific timing. For example, when a variable display effect that is a pseudo-continuous variation can be executed a plurality of times during the execution of one variable display, the timing at which the pseudo-continuous variation is started a specific time is set as a specific timing, and A specific effect may be executed before and after a specific timing. In such a case, as execution patterns of the specific effect, there are a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the specific effect after the specific timing and a second pattern that does not inherit the effect mode of the specific effect after the specific timing. When a predetermined effect such as a switching suggestion effect is executed after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, it is sufficient that the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed. In addition, when there is a first pattern that inherits the production mode of the specific production after the specific timing and a second pattern that does not inherit the production mode of the specific production after the specific timing, the various productions described in the above embodiment are provided. can be executed.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Part 002AK)
(1) A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
an effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display subject to determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The performance execution means is
As execution patterns of the specific performance, a first pattern that inherits the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the object of judgment, and a second pattern that does not inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the object of judgment. having a pattern and
When the predetermined effect is executed after starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific effect may be, for example, a character movement effect. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The first pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a switching suggestion effect. The fact that it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect may be, for example, the case where the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD.
According to such a configuration, when the predetermined effect is executed after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect, so that the degree of attention to the effect increases. The game interest can be improved by appropriately executing the predetermined performance and the specific performance so as to be heightened.

(2) A gaming machine that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state for the player,
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
a specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of the specific effect before the variable display subject to the determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The specific effect executing means has, as execution patterns of the specific effect, a first pattern that inherits the effect mode of the specific effect after the variable display that is the object of determination, and an effect of the specific effect after the variable display that is the object of determination. and a second pattern that does not inherit the aspect,
further comprising suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting switching to the first pattern when the specific effect is being executed in the second pattern,
The specific effect executing means can continue to execute the specific effect in the second pattern when the suggestive effect is executed after starting the execution of the specific effect in the second pattern and switching to the first pattern is not possible. may
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific effect may be, for example, a character movement effect. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The suggestive effect may be, for example, a switching suggestive effect. The suggestive effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS043, for example. The fact that the specific effect can be continuously executed in the second pattern may be, for example, the case of effect execution example 002AK115.
According to such a configuration, when the suggestive performance is executed after starting execution of the specific performance in the second pattern and switching to the first pattern is not possible, the specific performance can be continuously executed in the second pattern. As a result, the suggestive effect and the specific effect can be appropriately executed so as to increase the degree of attention to the effect, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
a specific effect execution means capable of starting execution of the specific effect before the variable display subject to the determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The specific effect executing means has, as execution patterns of the specific effect, a plurality of first patterns that inherit the effect mode of the specific effect after the variable display that is the object of determination, and a specific effect after the variable display that is the object of determination. and a second pattern that does not inherit the production mode of
further comprising a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect that makes the specific effect invisible,
The specific effect execution means is
When the special performance is executed and becomes invisible after the execution of the specific performance is started in the second pattern, the specific performance can be terminated without restarting,
When the special effect is executed and becomes invisible after starting the execution of the specific effect in the first pattern, the specific effect may be resumed in the first pattern having a different effect mode.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific effect may be, for example, a character movement effect. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS123. The first pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The special effect may be, for example, a character hiding effect. The special effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step AKS035. The fact that the specific effect can be terminated without resuming it may be, for example, when it is determined to "end display" in step AKS036. The fact that the specific effect can be resumed in the first pattern with a different effect mode is, for example, when it is determined to "resume display" in step AKS036, and when the display objects of the characters CH11 to CH14 change. good.
According to such a configuration, when the special effect is executed after starting the execution of the specific effect and becomes invisible, the first pattern differs from the case where the specific effect can be terminated without restarting the specific effect. Since there is a time when the specific performance can be restarted, the special performance and the specific performance can be appropriately executed so as to raise the degree of attention to the performance, and the game interest can be improved.

(4) A gaming machine that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
an effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display subject to determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The performance execution means is
As execution patterns of the specific production, there are a first pattern that inherits the production mode of the specific production after the variable display that is the object of judgment, and a plurality of patterns that do not inherit the production mode of the specific production after the variable display that is the object of judgment. a second pattern;
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed,
The rate at which the specific effect is switched to the first pattern and executed may differ according to the plurality of second patterns.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific effect may be, for example, a character movement effect. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The first pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The fact that it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect may be, for example, the case where the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD. The ratio of switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect may be different in the case of the setting example 002AKE01 of the display rate, for example.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of switching to the first pattern and executing the specific effect differs corresponding to the plurality of second patterns, so that the specific effect is appropriately executed so as to increase the degree of attention to the effect. As a result, the game interest can be improved.

(5) A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
an effect execution means capable of starting execution of a specific effect before the variable display subject to determination based on the determination by the determination means;
The performance execution means is
As execution patterns of the specific performance, there are a plurality of first patterns that inherit the performance mode of the specific performance after the variable display that is the object of judgment, and that the performance mode of the specific performance is not inherited after the variable display that is the object of judgment. a second pattern;
After starting execution of the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect can be switched to the first pattern and executed,
When the specific effect is started in the first pattern, and when the specific effect is switched to the first pattern after starting the specific effect in the second pattern, the specific effect is performed in any of the plurality of first patterns. The rate at which they are executed may differ.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The specific effect may be, for example, a character movement effect. The effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The first pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSB. The second pattern may be, for example, an effect pattern included in the moving effect type RSA. The fact that it is possible to switch to the first pattern and execute the specific effect may be, for example, the case where the character movement effect is executed in the effect pattern included in the movement effect type RSD. The ratio of which of the plurality of first patterns the specific effect is executed may be different, for example, in the case of display rate setting example 002 AKE02.
According to such a configuration, the plurality of first By varying the ratio of which of the patterns the specific performance is executed, the specific performance can be appropriately executed so as to raise the degree of attention to the performance, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) A gaming machine that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a corresponding display means capable of displaying a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display;
a change effect executing means capable of executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the correspondence display from the first mode to a second mode controlled to be more advantageous than the first mode and having a higher degree of expectation;
A history-suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a history-suggestion effect corresponding to the first mode after execution of the change effect is started may be provided.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The corresponding display may be, for example, a pending display or an active display. The change effect may be, for example, an active display change effect. The change effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 that controls the active display change effect by step AKS131, for example. The history suggestion effect may be, for example, the effect by the active display of the effect execution example 002AK204. The history suggestion effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 that controls the display state of the active display in step AKS131, for example.
According to such a configuration, since the history suggesting effect corresponding to the first mode can be executed after the execution of the change effect is started, it is possible to recognize the display mode so far with respect to the corresponding display, and the game interest can be enhanced. can be improved.

(7) A gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
A suggestive effect capable of executing a first effect and a second effect switched after the first effect is executed as a suggestive effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state when the variable display is in a ready-to-reach state. a means of execution;
a corresponding performance executing means capable of executing a first corresponding performance corresponding to the first performance and a second corresponding performance corresponding to the second performance;
The corresponding effect executing means may be capable of starting execution of the second corresponding effect during execution of the first effect before switching from the first effect to the second effect.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The suggestive effect may be, for example, a ready-to-reach effect for super reach. The first effect may be, for example, the effect by displaying the character CH201 in the effect execution examples 002AK302 and 002AK303. The second effect may be, for example, the effect by displaying the character CH202 in the effect execution example 002AK304. The suggestive effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the ready-to-win effect in step AKS133, for example. The first corresponding effect may be, for example, a message display effect in the effect execution example 002AK302. The second corresponding effect may be, for example, a message display effect in the effect execution example 002AK304. The corresponding effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the message display at step AKS133. The fact that the execution of the second corresponding effect can be started during the execution of the first effect may be, for example, effect by message display in example 002AK303 of effect execution.
According to such a configuration, before switching from the first effect to the second effect, the execution of the second corresponding effect can be started during the execution of the first effect, so that it is possible to easily recognize the switching of the effects and the relationship. , can improve the game interest.

(8) A gaming machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the system is controlled in an advantageous state;
transparent display means capable of transparently displaying identification information according to a transition pattern in a special effect;
special image display means capable of suggesting the degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state by displaying the special image when the identification information is transmitted;
Different types of special images may be displayed depending on whether the transition pattern is the first transition pattern or the second transition pattern.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special effect may be, for example, a post-reach effect. The special effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the after-reach effect in step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the effect pattern in any one of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in step AKS133. The special image may be, for example, a background display effect, a step-up effect, an effect image that can be displayed in a story effect, or the like. The special image display means may be, for example, the image display device 5 when the after-reach effect is executed in step AKS133. The different types of special images to be displayed may be determined, for example, by determination of transmission patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in determination example 002AKD62.
According to such a configuration, when the transition pattern is the first transition pattern and when the transition pattern is the second transition pattern, the type of the special image displayed is different. Amusement in the game can be improved by appropriately executing the special performance so as to increase the degree.

(9) A gaming machine that executes variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the system is controlled in an advantageous state;
a transparent display means capable of transparently displaying the identification information according to the transition pattern in the special effect,
The special performance is
Including a specific period,
a first special effect capable of displaying identification information with a first transmittance from the start to the end of the specific period;
The identification information can be displayed at a second transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the start of the specific period, and the identification information can be displayed in a transmittance lower than the first transmittance in response to the end of the specific period. and a second special effect that can be displayed with a high third transmittance,
The degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the second special effect is executed than when the first special effect is executed.
Here, the identification information may be, for example, a production pattern or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special effect may be, for example, a post-reach effect. The special effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the execution of the after-reach effect in step AKS133. The transparent display means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that controls the transparent display of the effect pattern in any one of the pattern transparent patterns TSP1 to TSP3 in step AKS133. The first special effect may be, for example, a background display effect. The second special effect may be, for example, a step-up effect, a story effect, or the like. The high expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, the decision rate in decision example 002 AKD61.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the first special effect and the second special effect with different transmittance settings, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(10) A gaming machine that executes variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
determination means capable of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display before the variable display is executed;
a change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect of changing the display mode of the specific display prior to the variable display that is the object of the determination, based on the determination by the determination means;
The specific display means can display the specific display for a longer period of time in the variable display corresponding to the specific display targeted for the change production when the change production is executed than when the change production is not executed. and
When the specific display is displayed for a long period of time, the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed for a short period of time,
If the pre-stage effect is executed without the change effect being executed before the variable display that is the target of the judgment, than if the change effect is executed before the variable display that is the target of the judgment Alternatively, the specific display may be displayed for a long period of time after the variable display that is the object of determination.
Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The specific display may be, for example, a timer standby effect or a character display in a timer effect. The determining means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the starting port switch passage processing P_TZU_ON in steps S104 and S108. The change effect may be, for example, a timer standby effect executed in the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2. The change effect execution means may be the effect control CPU 120 or the like that controls the execution of the timer standby effect in the effect patterns TPB1-1 and TPB1-2 in step AKS127, for example. The fact that the specific display can be displayed for a long period after the specific timing may be, for example, the decision rate of the production patterns TPB0, TPB1-1, and TPB1-2 in decision example 002AKD23. The high degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state may be, for example, the determination rate of the timer effect in decision example 002AKD21, the determination rate of the effect pattern in decision example 002AKD22, or the like. The fact that the specific display can be displayed for a long period of time after the specific timing may be, for example, the decision rate of the effect patterns TPB2-1 and TPB2-2 in decision example 002AKD23.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the change effect and the pre-stage effect so as to increase the degree of attention to the specific display, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Pachinko machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 50 Special variable winning ball device 100 Game control microcomputer 101 , 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
120 ... CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
A first effect and a second effect switched after execution of the first effect can be executed as a suggestive effect suggesting control to the advantageous state when the variable display is in a ready-to-reach state. Suggestion production execution means;
a corresponding effect executing means capable of executing a first corresponding effect corresponding to the first effect and a second corresponding effect corresponding to the second effect;
The corresponding effect execution means is capable of starting execution of the second corresponding effect during execution of the first effect before switching from the first effect to the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images